MANUAL T800 THERMAL

Administrator’s Manual
T800
Thermal Printers
Printronix Auto ID makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material, including, but
not limited to, implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Printronix Auto ID
shall not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any
damages, whether direct, indirect, incidental or consequential, in connection with the furnishing, distribution,
performance or use of this material. The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No part of this document may be
reproduced, copied, translated or incorporated in any other material in any form or by any means, whether
manual, graphic, electronic, mechanical or otherwise, without the prior written consent of Printronix Auto
ID.
COPYRIGHT © 2021 PRINTRONIX AUTO ID TECHNOLOGY, INC. All rights reserved.
Trademark Acknowledgements
Printronix, IGP, Auto Label Mapping, LinePrinter Plus, PGL, and PrintNet are registered trademarks of
Printronix, Inc.
T800, T8000, and T6000 are trademarks of Printronix Auto ID Technology, Inc.
Code V is a trademark of QMS, Inc.

QMS is a registered trademark of Quality Micro Systems, Inc.
IBM is registered trademark of International Business Machines Corp.
MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
EIA is a registered service mark of Electronic Industries Association.
ZPL, ZPL II, and Zebra are registered trademarks of Zebra Technologies Corporation.
TEC is a registered trademark of the Toshiba TEC Corporation.
Intermec is a registered trademark of Honeywell Corporation.
SATO is a registered trademark of SATO America, Inc.
DPL is a trademark and Datamax is a registered trademark of Honeywell Corporation.
IER is a registered trademark of IER Siège
Monarch is a registered trademark of Avery-Dennison Corporation.
SD, SDHC and SDXC are trademarks or registered trademarks of SD-3C, LLC in the United States,
other countries or both. Also, miniSD, microSD, miniSDHC, microSDHC, microSDXC, smartSD,
smartSDHC, SDIO and miniSDIO are all trademarks or registered trademarks of SD-3C, LLC in the
United States, other countries or both.
Page | 2
Regulatory Compliance
EN 55032:2015
EN 55024
EN 60950-1
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
FCC part 15B, Class A
ICES-003, Class A
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference with radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case you will
be required to correct the interference at your own expense.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conform à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
AS/NZS CISPR 32, Class A
K 60950-1, KN 32 / KN 35
이 기기는 업무용(A 급) 전자파적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을
주의하시기 바라며, 가정외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다.
GB 4943.1
GB/T9254, Class A
GB 17625.1
此为 A 级产品，在生活环境中，该产品可能会造成无线电干扰，
在这种情况下，可能需要用户对干扰采取切实可行的措施。
Page | 3
NBTC
Class A
NBTC ID. A56012-19-1903
เครื่องโทรคมนาคมและอุปกรณ์ นมี้ ีความสอดคล้ องตามมาตรฐานหรือข้ อกําหนดทางเทคนิคของ กสทช.
IS 13252(Part 1)/
IEC 60950-1
UL 60950-1/UL 62368-1
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-1 /62368-1
Mexico CoC UL 60950-1
CNS 13438 警告使用者：此為甲類資訊技術設備，於居

CNS 14336-1 住環境中使用時，可能會造成射頻擾動，在此種
CNS 15663 況下，使用者會被要求採取某些適當的對策。
TP TC 020
Energy Star for Imaging Equipment Version 3.0

The menu setting System > Energy Star > Pwr Saver Time is default
5 minutes and can be modified by user if desired.
Important Safety Instructions:

1. Read all of these instructions and keep them for later use.
2. Follow all warnings and instructions on the product.
3. Disconnect the power plug from the AC source before cleaning.
Page | 4
4. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Using a damp cloth is suitable for cleaning.
5. The mains socket shall be installed near the equipment and easily accessible.
6. The unit must be protected against moisture.
7. Ensure the stability when installing the device, Tipping or dropping could cause damage.
8. Make sure to follow the correct power rating and power type indicated on marking label provided
by manufacture.
9. Please refer to user manual for maximum operation ambient temperature.
CAUTION:
(For equipment with RTC (CR2032) battery or rechargeable battery pack)
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.
Dispose of used batteries according to the Instructions as below.
1. DO NOT throw the battery in fire.
2. DO NOT short circuit the contacts.
3. DO NOT disassemble the battery.
4. DO NOT throw the battery in municipal waste.
5. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the battery should not be placed in
municipal waste.
Caution: The printhead may be hot and could cause severe burns. Allow the printhead to
cool.
CAUTION:
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the grantee of this device could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
Below statement are for product with optional RF function.

CE Statement:
This equipment complies with EU radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This
equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator & your
body.
All operational modes:

2.4GHz: 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n (HT20), 802.11n (HT40)
5GHz: 802.11a, 802.11ac.
The frequency, mode and the maximum transmitted power in EU are listed below:
2400 MHz – 2483.5 MHz: 19.88 dBm (EIRP)(Wi-Fi)
5150 MHz – 5250 MHz: 17.51 dBm (EIRP)(Wi-Fi)
2402 MHz – 2480 MHz: 6.02 dBm (EIRP)(Bluetooth)
Requirements in
AT/BE/BG/CZ/DK/EE/FR/DE/IS/IE/IT/EL/ES/CY/LV/LI/LT/LU/HU/MT/NL/NO/PL/PT/RO/SI/SK/TR/FI/SE/C
H/UK/HR. 5150MHz~5350MHz is for indoor use only.
5150-5350MHz for Only indoor use

5470-5725MHz for indoor/outdoor use
Restrictions In AZE
National restrictions information is provided below
Frequency Band Country Remark
No license needed if used indoor and
5150-5350MHz Azerbaijan
power not exceeding 30mW
Page | 5
5470-5725MHz
Hereby, PRINTRONIX Auto ID Technology Co., Ltd. declares that the radio equipment type [Wi-Fi] IEEE
802.11 a/b/g/n/ac is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available on our website.
Canada, Industry Canada (IC) Notices

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 and RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Canada, avis de l'Industry Canada (IC)

Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux normes canadiennes ICES-003 et RSS-210.
Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer
d'interférence et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence, notamment les interférences qui peuvent
affecter son fonctionnement.
NCC 警語:
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變
更原設計之特性及功能。(即低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法第十二條)
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至
無干擾時方得繼續使用。
前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信。低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療
用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。(即低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法第十四條)
BSMI Class A 警語:
這是甲類的資訊產品，在居住的環境使用中時，可能會造成射頻干擾，在這種情況下，使用者會被要求採
取某些適當的對策。
限用物質含有情況標示聲明
單元 Unit 限用物質及其化學符號
Restricted substances and its chemical symbols
六價鉻多溴聯苯多溴二苯醚
鎘
鉛Lead 汞Mercury Hexavalent Polybrominated Polybrominated
Cadmium
(Pb) (Hg) chromium biphenyls diphenyl ethers
(Cd)
(Cr+6 ) (PBB) (PBDE)
內外塑膠件 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
內外鐵件 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
滾輪 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
電路板組件 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
晶片電阻 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
積層陶瓷表
面黏著電容 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
集成電路-
IC
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
電源供應器 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
印字頭 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
馬達 - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Page | 6
插座 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
線材 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
備考 1.〝超出 0.1 wt %〞及〝超出 0.01 wt %〞係指限用物質之百分比含量超出百分比含量基準值。
Note 1：“Exceeding 0.1 wt %” and “exceeding 0.01 wt %” indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the
reference percentage value of presence condition.
備考 2.〝○〞係指該項限用物質之百分比含量未超出百分比含量基準值。
Note 2：“○” indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence.
備考 3.〝－〞係指該項限用物質為排除項目。
Note 3：The “−” indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption.
Page | 7
Warnings and Special Information
For your safety and to protect valuable equipment, read and comply with all information highlighted under
special headings:
WARNING Conditions that could harm you and damage the equipment.
WARNING Achten Sie auf folgendes, um keine Personen in Gefahr zubringen bzw. das
Gerät zu beschädigen.
WARNING Condiciones que pueden causar daños a personas y equipos.
WARNING Conditions à respecter pour éviter tout danger corporel et dommage matériel.
WARNING Condizioni che possono arrecare danni alle persone e alle apparecchiature.
CAUTION Conditions that could damage the printer or related equipment.
IMPORTANT Information vital to proper operation of the printer.
NOTE: Information and helpful tips about printer operation.
Important Safety Instructions

1. Read all of these instructions and keep them for later use.
2. Follow all warnings and instructions on the product.
3. Disconnect the power plug from the AC outlet before cleaning or if a fault occurs.
4. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Using a damp cloth is suitable for cleaning printer surfaces.
5. The mains socket shall be installed near the equipment and easily accessible.
6. The unit must be protected against moisture.
7. Ensure the stability when installing the device. Tipping or dropping could cause damage.
8. Make sure to follow the correct power rating and power type indicated on marking label provided by
manufacturer.
9. Please refer to user manual for maximum operation ambient temperature.
WARNING Hazardous moving parts, keep fingers and other body parts away.
CAUTION Risk of explosion if RTC battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used
batteries according to the Instructions listed below.
• DO NOT throw the battery in fire.
• DO NOT short circuit the contacts.
• DO NOT disassemble the battery.
• DO NOT throw the battery in municipal waste.
• The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the battery should not be
placed in municipal waste.
CAUTION The printhead may be hot and could cause severe burns. Allow the printhead to
cool before servicing.
Page | 8
MFI Bluetooth
Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to connect specifically to
the Apple product(s) identified in the badge, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with
safety and regulatory standards.
For US Model
Made for iPhone®XS Max, iPhone XS, iPhone XR, iPhone X, iPhone 8, iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone 7, iPhone 7
Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 5s, iPad Pro® 12.9-inch (2nd
generation), iPad Pro 10.5-inch, iPad® (6th generation), iPad (5th generation), iPad Pro 9.7-inch, iPad Pro
12.9-inch (1st generation), iPad Air® 2, iPad mini™ 4, iPad mini 3, iPad Air, iPad mini 2, iPod touch® (6th
generation) iPad, iPad Air, iPad Pro, iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
For JP Model
Made for iPhone XS Max, iPhone XS, iPhone XR, iPhone X, iPhone 8, iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone 7, iPhone 7
Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 5s, iPad Pro 12.9-inch (2nd
generation), iPad Pro 10.5-inch, iPad (6th generation), iPad (5th generation), iPad Pro 9.7-inch, iPad Pro
12.9-inch (1st generation), iPad Air 2, iPad mini 4, iPad mini 3, iPad Air, iPad mini 2, iPod touch (6th
generation) iPad, iPad Air, iPad Pro, iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries. The trademark “iPhone” is used in Japan with a license from Aiphone K.K.
Except for US, JP Model
Made for iPhone XS Max, iPhone XS, iPhone XR, iPhone X, iPhone 8, iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone 7, iPhone 7
Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 5s, iPad Pro 12.9-inch (2nd
generation), iPad Pro 10.5-inch, iPad (6th generation), iPad (5th generation), iPad Pro 9.7-inch, iPad Pro
12.9-inch (1st generation), iPad Air 2, iPad mini 4, iPad mini 3, iPad Air, iPad mini 2, iPod touch (6th
generation)
iPad, iPad Air, iPad Pro, iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Page | 9
Manual Conventions
• Operator panel keys are printed in uppercase letters.
Example: Press the PAUSE key and then press ENTER.
• Operator panel keys are often shown by their symbol or icon (located on the control panel directly
above the key).
Example: Press the ↵ key for ENTER.
• Operator panel menu settings are often shown by their full location that includes the ICON name,
submenu, and then menu, each separated with a ‘>’ sign.
Example: Change the Media > Image > Label Length menu.
• Control panel LCD messages are printed in uppercase letters inside quotation marks ( “ ” ).
Example: When “OFFLINE” appears on the control panel LCD, you may release the PAUSE key.
• Key combinations are indicated by the + (plus) symbol.
Example: Press ↑ + ↓ means Press the Up ↑ key and the Down ↓ key at the same time.
Page | 10
Table of Contents
Trademark Acknowledgements ........................................................................... 2

Regulatory Compliance ....................................................................................... 3
Warnings and Special Information ...................................................................... 8
Important Safety Instructions ............................................................................... 8
MFI Bluetooth ...................................................................................................... 9
Manual Conventions .......................................................................................... 10
1 Introduction .................................................................. 19
The T800 Family of Printers .............................................................................. 19
Standard Features ............................................................................................. 19
Optional Features .............................................................................................. 20
2 Operation ..................................................................... 22
Controls and Indicators...................................................................................... 22
Power Switch .............................................................................................. 22
Control Panel .............................................................................................. 22
Operating Modes ............................................................................................... 23
Online Screen .................................................................................................... 24
Offline (Home) Screen ....................................................................................... 25
Wizard .............................................................................................. 25
Settings .............................................................................................. 26
Calibrate .............................................................................................. 28
Fault ..................................................................................................... 28
Job in Process ............................................................................................ 28
Media Handling Modes ...................................................................................... 29
Setting Up the Printer ........................................................................................ 29
Loading Ribbon ........................................................................................... 29
Loading Media ............................................................................................ 32
Loading External Media .............................................................................. 35
Positioning the Media Sensors ................................................................... 36
Sensing Different Media Types ................................................................... 37
Media with No Label Length Indicators ........................................................ 38
Media with Underside Horizontal Black Marks ............................................... 38
Media with Gaps, Notches or Holes ........................................................... 38
Media with Gaps ......................................................................................... 38
Calibrating the Media Sensors .................................................................... 39
Running Auto Calibrate ............................................................................... 39
Running Media Profile ................................................................................. 40
Page | 11
Gap Sensing ............................................................................................... 41
Running Manual Calibrate .......................................................................... 42
Label Peel-Off (Optional) ................................................................................... 44
Loading Media Using Peel-Off Mode .......................................................... 44
Configuring the Printer Menu ...................................................................... 45
Media Cutter (Optional) ..................................................................................... 46
Loading Media Using Cutter Mode ............................................................. 46
Configuring the Printer Menu ...................................................................... 46
Printing Adjustments.......................................................................................... 47
Printhead Burn Line Adjustment ................................................................. 47
Cleaning ............................................................................................................ 48
Exterior Cleaning ........................................................................................ 48
Interior Cleaning .......................................................................................... 48
Cleaning the Printhead, Platen Roller, Media Sensors/Damper................. 48
Printhead Cleaning ..................................................................................... 48
Platen Roller Cleaning ................................................................................ 49
Media Sensor Cleaning ............................................................................... 49
Cutter Option Cleaning ............................................................................... 50
3 Printer Settings ............................................................ 51

Overview ............................................................................................................ 51
Unlocking the Control Panel .............................................................................. 51
Setting Printer Configuration Parameters .................................................... 51
Saving a Configuration .................................................................... 53

Auto Save Configuration ............................................................................. 54
Naming Configurations ............................................................................... 54
Loading a Configuration .............................................................................. 55
Specifying a Power-Up Configuration ......................................................... 55
Modifying a Saved Configuration ................................................................ 55
Viewing the Current Configuration .............................................................. 55
Printing a Configuration .............................................................................. 56
Settings Organization ........................................................................ 57
Quick Setup ........................................................................................ 58

Menu Items ................................................................................................. 58
Entering Safe Mode .................................................................................... 59
Exiting Safe Mode ....................................................................................... 60
Forgot the Password ................................................................................... 60
Media .................................................................................................... 61
Page | 12
Intro: Label Length ...................................................................................... 61
Intro: Clip Page ........................................................................................... 61
Media > Image ............................................................................................ 62
Media > Speed ............................................................................................ 68
Media > Handling ........................................................................................ 69
Media > Ribbon ........................................................................................... 74
Media > TOF ............................................................................................... 74
Media > Fault .............................................................................................. 76
Media > Auto Label Map ............................................................................. 77
Auto Label Map Examples .......................................................................... 78
Example 1: Simple Case ............................................................................. 78
Example 2: Uneven Number Case .............................................................. 79
Example 3: Past Maximum File Width ......................................................... 80
Example 4: Blank Label Case ..................................................................... 80
Sensors ................................................................................................ 81
Intro: Sensor Types ..................................................................................... 81
Sensors > Control ....................................................................................... 81
Sensors > Calibrate .................................................................................... 83
Sensors > Diagnostics ................................................................................ 89
System ............................................................................................... 91
System > Control ........................................................................................ 91
System > Energy Star ................................................................................. 94
System > Flash File View ........................................................................... 94
System > Flash File Edit ............................................................................. 94
System > SD File View ............................................................................... 96
System > SD File Edit ................................................................................. 96
System > USB File View ............................................................................. 98
System > USB File Edit............................................................................... 99
System > Printer Mgmt ............................................................................. 100
System > Date .......................................................................................... 103
Host IO .......................................................................................... 105

Host IO > Control ...................................................................................... 105
Host IO > USB Port ................................................................................... 105
Host IO > Serial Port ................................................................................. 107
Host IO > Bluetooth................................................................................... 116
Host IO > Host USB .................................................................................. 118
Network ............................................................................................ 119
Page | 13
Network > Control ..................................................................................... 119
Network > Ethernet ................................................................................... 121
Network > WLAN ...................................................................................... 124
Network > WLAN Params ......................................................................... 126
Network > WLAN EAP .............................................................................. 133
Application ..................................................................................... 135

LP+, PGL, VGL Character Sets ................................................................ 135
Application > Control ................................................................................. 139
Application > PGL Setup ........................................................................... 144
Application > LP+ SETUP ......................................................................... 155
Application > P-SERIES Setup ................................................................. 160
Application > P-SERIES XQ Setup ........................................................... 166
Application > Serial Matrix Setup .............................................................. 170
Application > Proprinter Setup .................................................................. 174
Application > Epson FX Setup .................................................................. 178
Application > Fonts ................................................................................... 182
Configs .............................................................................................. 184

Configs > Control ...................................................................................... 184
Configs > Custom ..................................................................................... 185
Tools ................................................................................................. 187

Tools > Print Tests .................................................................................... 187
Tools > Diagnostics................................................................................... 188
Tools > Advanced ..................................................................................... 190
Tools > PTF Debug ................................................................................... 192
Tools > PTF Flags ..................................................................................... 192
Tools > Statistics ....................................................................................... 193
Tools > About ............................................................................................ 195
RFID .................................................................................................. 197

RFID > Control .......................................................................................... 197
RFID > Tag Calibration ............................................................................. 197
RFID > Calibration Param ......................................................................... 197
RFID > RFID Chip Param ......................................................................... 197
RFID > Diagnostics ................................................................................... 197
RFID > Statistics ....................................................................................... 198
4 Downloading Firmware .............................................. 199

Firmware File Types (.prg) and (.exe) ............................................................. 200
Page | 14
Web Page Download ....................................................................................... 201
Automatic Download (.exe) ............................................................................. 203
Manual Two-Key Download Sequence ........................................................... 205
Manual Three-Key Download Sequence......................................................... 205
Sending Firmware in Download Mode ............................................................ 206
Sending Firmware via Ethernet or Wifi (LPR) ........................................... 206
Sending Firmware via USB ....................................................................... 206
Downloading Files to the Main File System .................................................... 208
Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus ..................................................... 208
File Properties Not Shown in Menus ............................................................... 209
Web Page Download ....................................................................................... 209
PTX_SETUP Download................................................................................... 211
Manual Two-Key Download ............................................................................ 211
Downloading Files to the SD Card .................................................................. 212
Using TrueType Fonts ..................................................................................... 212
Downloading TrueType Fonts ................................................................... 212
PGL Emulation .......................................................................................... 213
Manual Two-Key Download ...................................................................... 213
Labeling Applications ................................................................................ 213
Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts ......................................... 213
To Print ASCII Characters ........................................................................ 213
To Print All Characters .............................................................................. 214
Demo Facility ................................................................................................... 214
Downloading a Demo File ......................................................................... 214
Configuring the Printer to Run a Demo File .................................................... 215
Starting a Demo File ................................................................................. 215
Pausing a Demo File ................................................................................. 215
Stopping a Demo File ............................................................................... 215
Deleting a Demo File ................................................................................ 215
WLAN Radio Firmware Upgrade ..................................................................... 216
Firmware Download Methods ................................................................... 216
5 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting ............................... 217

Printer Tests...................................................................................................... 217
Troubleshooting Common Situations................................................................. 217
Interfacing ................................................................................................. 217
Hex Dump Mode ....................................................................................... 217
Controlling Print Quality ............................................................................ 218
Replacing the Printhead assembly ........................................................... 220
Restore the Printer to Operation ............................................................... 222
Solving Other Printer Problems ................................................................ 223
Printer Alarms ........................................................................................... 231
Fault Messages ......................................................................................... 231
Page | 15
Operator-Correctable Fault Messages ..................................................... 231
Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention ................................... 231
Fatal Messages Requiring Firmware Upgrade or Diagnostics ................. 231
Hex Dump Mode ....................................................................................... 240
Diagnostics for Fatal Error ........................................................................ 241
A Specifications ............................................................ 242

Print Method .............................................................................................. 242
Media ........................................................................................................ 243
Ribbon ....................................................................................................... 245
Indicators and Switches ............................................................................ 245
Memory ..................................................................................................... 246
Media Cutter Option .................................................................................. 246
Host Interfaces .......................................................................................... 247
Power ........................................................................................................ 247
Environmental ........................................................................................... 248
Physical ..................................................................................................... 248
Acoustic Specifications ............................................................................. 248
B Printer Options ........................................................... 249

Media Handling Accessories ........................................................................... 249
Media Cutter.............................................................................................. 249
Peel Dispenser .......................................................................................... 249
Hardware Options ............................................................................................ 249
RFID .......................................................................................................... 249
Interface Options ............................................................................................. 249
Wireless NIC (802.11 a/b/g/n/ac/b/g/n wireless)....................................... 249
Bluetooth 4.2 ............................................................................................. 249
Software Options ............................................................................................. 250
Premium Asian Fonts ................................................................................ 250
Quick Change Memory Cartridge ............................................................. 250
Supplies ........................................................................................................... 250
Manuals ........................................................................................................... 250
C Media Cutter Installation ................................................ 251

Printer Media Cutter Installation ...................................................................... 251
Preparing the Printer ....................................................................................... 251
Installing the Media Cutter ............................................................................... 251
D Peel-off Module Installation ............................................ 254

Printer Peel-off Module Installation ................................................................. 254
Preparing the Printer ....................................................................................... 254
Installing the Peel-off Module .......................................................................... 254
Page | 16
E Loading WLAN Certificates ........................................ 257
Overview .......................................................................................................... 257
WiFi Certificates ........................................................................................ 257
SOTI Certificates ....................................................................................... 257
802.1x Certificates .................................................................................... 257
WiFi Certificates .............................................................................................. 258
Windows Procedure .................................................................................. 258
Linux Procedure ........................................................................................ 258
Webpage Procedure ................................................................................. 259
SOTI Certificates: Create the Download File .................................................. 261
802.1x Certificates: Create the Download File ................................................ 262
F PTX_SETUP Commands........................................... 263

Overview .......................................................................................................... 263
Command Format .............................................................................................. 263
CONFIG Commands ....................................................................................... 264
Configuration Upload / Download ............................................................. 266
INFO Return Status .................................................................................. 266
GETMENU Command and Return Data ................................................... 267
FILE_IO Commands ........................................................................................ 267
ENGINE Commands ....................................................................................... 269
RFID Commands ............................................................................................. 271
ODV-2D Commands........................................................................................ 273
Miscellaneous Commands .............................................................................. 275
LP MODE Commands .............................................................................. 275
NIC_SETUP Commands .......................................................................... 275
GPIO Commands ...................................................................................... 276
PRINTJOB Commands ............................................................................. 276
G Quick Change Memory Card (QCMC) ....................... 277

Overview .......................................................................................................... 277
Installing the QCMC ........................................................................................ 278
Saving the Printer’s Configuration to the QCMC ............................................. 278
Copying the QCMC “Snapshot” Image to a Second Printer ........................................... 280
Updating the QCMC Image ................................................................................... 282
Erasing the QCMC Image ...................................................................................... 282
H Custom Configuration Module (CCM) ........................ 284

Overview .......................................................................................................... 284
Creating a CCM Package ................................................................................ 284
Configuring Printers ......................................................................................... 285
Printer Firmware Compatibility ........................................................................ 286
CCM Content Description ................................................................................ 287
Program File and Feature File .................................................................. 287
Page | 17
CST and GPIO Files ................................................................................. 287
Fonts and File System .............................................................................. 287
Network Config File ................................................................................... 287
Emulation Setup ........................................................................................ 288
PTX_SETUP Printer Config ...................................................................... 288
I Customer Support...................................................... 289

Printronix Customer Support Center ............................................................... 289
Corporate Offices ............................................................................................ 290
J Glossary .................................................................... 291

K Communication Notices and Warranties .................... 296
Communication Statements ................................................................................ 297
European Union Conformity...................................................................... 298
Industry Canada Compliance Statement .................................................. 298
Statement of CISPR 32 Compliance ........................................................ 298
German Conformity Statement ................................................................. 299
Korea ......................................................................................................... 299
China ......................................................................................................... 300
Software License Agreement .......................................................................... 301
eCos .......................................................................................................... 302
Open SSL.................................................................................................. 303
OpenSSL License ..................................................................................... 303
Original SSLeay License........................................................................... 304
WPA Supplicant License........................................................................... 305
Brian Gladman AES Library ...................................................................... 305
Google Font Open Sans ........................................................................... 306
Cousine Font ............................................................................................. 306
Limited Software Product Warranty................................................................. 307
Remedy ..................................................................................................... 307
Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies .............................. 307
Termination of License Agreement ........................................................... 307
U.S. Government Restricted Rights .......................................................... 307
Acknowledgement of Terms and Conditions ............................................ 308
Product Warranty Information ......................................................................... 308
Page | 18
1 Introduction
The T800 Family of Printers

NOTE: The terms “T800” and “printer” refer to both the T820 (203 DPI) and T830 (300 DPI) models.
The T800 series consists of a family of high quality, desktop direct thermal and thermal transfer printers
specifically designed for printing labels and tags from multiple environments:
• Windows®
• Unix/Linux
• MS-DOS®
• SAP/ERP (PGL-based SAP device type)
The T800 series is comprised of the products detailed in Table 1.
Table 1. The T800 Series
Max Print Printing Max Print

Version
Speed (ips) Density Width
T820 8 203 4.1
T830 6 300 4.1
Standard Features
• Thermal Transfer and Direct Thermal Printing
• High Resolution Printhead: 203dpi or 300dpi for sharp graphics and text.
• Sensors: Fixed media Gap, adjustable Black Mark sensor, Head Open, Ribbon End sensors
• User Interface: 3.5” color LCD screen, with 9 button keyboard
• 128MB DDR3 memory (fixed).
• 128MB NAND Flash memory (fixed).
• Auto Label Mapping®: For compatibility with programs written for Printronix line matrix printers.
• Bar Codes: Supports multiple types of 1-D and 2-D bar codes.
• Download: Fonts, forms, and graphics to printer memory.
• Emulations:
o Printronix PGL® for text, barcodes, graphics, lines, and boxes.
o Printronix LinePrinter Plus® (LP+) for direct compatibility with Printronix P-Series printers,
Epson FX-1050, Proprinter IIIXL, and Serial Matrix Printers.
o Printronix VGL. Emulates the QMS Code V™ Version II programming language.
Page | 19
o ZGL interpreter for legacy ZPL (Zebra®) applications
o TGL interpreter for legacy TEC (TEC®) applications
o IGL interpreter for legacy IPL (Intermec®) applications
o STGL interpreter for legacy SPL (SATO®) applications
o DGL interpreter for legacy DPL™ (Datamax®) applications
o IEGL interpreter for legacy IER-520® (IER®) applications
o MGL interpreter for legacy MPCL II® (Monarch®) applications
o EGL interpreter for Eltron® applications
• Serial RS-232: DB9 connector
• USB 2.0 Universal Serial Bus (Type B)
• USB / host 2.0 (Type A): The USB host port shall be capable of supporting USB memory
devices.
• Network Interface Port: This interface allows you to attach the printer to a LAN (Local Area
Network). The port is visible on the back panel. The Ethernet port is a 10/100Base and supports
data transfer rates up to 100 Mbps. The PrintNet Enterprise Suite (PNE) remote management
software can be downloaded from our website at no cost.
• Real Time Clock (RTC): The RTC has an internal battery. The clock keeps track of the year,
month, day, hour, minute and second values. It will continue to operate when the printer is off.
Graphic languages can use the RTC values to program fields in labels to indicate the date and/or
time.
• Resident Fonts (Standard Firmware): Letter Gothic Bold (#93779), Courier Bold (#93952), CG
Triumvirate Bold Condensed (#92250), OCR-A (#90993), OCR-B (#91409), CG Triumvirate
(#92244), CG Triumvirate Bold (#92248), and CG Times New Roman (#92500).
• Mini SD memory card slot: Supports SD cards from 4 to 32 GB.
Optional Features
Ask your authorized representative about the following enhancement options:
• Peel Dispenser: Peels off labels one at a time before printing the next label. Liner is ejected to
front of printer.
• Media Cutter: Automatically cuts printed media when the media exits the printer.
• RFID MP2 Encoder: The RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) UHF encoder reads and writes
information to smart labels (with embedded RFID tags) with a pitch typically two to six inches.
These labels are used on shipping cartons and pallets. Not available as a field installed option
(factory only).
• Premium Asian Fonts: A selection of three different purchasable Asian fonts can be provided
(one font per SD card). These Asian fonts include Hanzi GB, Kanji SJIS, and Hangul. They are
available for use when the SD card is installed.
• Andalé Fonts: A selection of four different purchasable Andale fonts can be provided (one font
per SD card). The Andale fonts will become active when the SD card is installed.
• QCMC (Quick Change Memory Card): The QCMC SD card provides the ability to duplicate an
entire printer’s firmware, saved configurations, and custom files quickly through the printer’s
control panel with a user friendly interface.
• Bluetooth 4.2: The BT 4.2 adapter provides wireless communications protocol designed for low
power usage, within a short range. Not available as a field installed option (factory only).
Page | 20
• Wireless Network: This card provides wireless 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/b/g/n connectivity without
expensive cabling and reconfigurations required from a wired network. Wi-Fi Alliance certified.
PNE is standard with this option. Not available as a field installed option (factory only).
For more information about printer options, see Appendix B page 249.
Page | 21
2 Operation
Controls and Indicators

Power Switch
The power switch is located on the bottom back left panel of the printer. To apply power, place the switch in
the | (ON) position. When you first power on the printer, an initialization sequence will immediately appear
on the color LCD control panel.
To remove power, place the power switch in the O (OFF) position.
Control Panel
The control panel is located on the top of the printer and includes a Status LED, QVGA color display,
PAUSE key, FEED key, LEFT SOFT key, RIGHT SOFT key, and navigation keys (buttons) with the
ENTER button in the center. These are described in the following tables.
Navigation / Enter
Status LED
LEFT SOFT key RIGHT SOFT key
PAUSET key FEED Key
The QVGA (quarter VGA) screen is a 320 x 240 pixel color display (non-touch). It is comprised of a
Header that shows the printer state and location with the User Interface (UI), the general display area,
and a footer used to show the purpose of the LEFT and RIGHT SOFT keys (when available).
The status LED indicates when the printer is ONLINE, OFFLINE, or when there is a fault condition:
• LED is on solid: ONLINE and Ready to Print.
• LED is off: OFFLINE and not accepting data.
• LED is flashing: Fault Indicator.
Page | 22
Button Description Functionality
PAUSE Key When ONLINE, sets printer to OFFLINE Mode

Toggles the printer between and the UI to the Home Screen.
ONLINE and OFFLINE Modes. When OFFLINE, puts the printer back ONLINE.
FEED Key Advances the media one label length. When

ONLINE, the menu System Control > Feed Key
Online must be enabled for this key to function.
Navigational Keys Used to select icons, menu selection, and

The navigational menus consist navigation in the UI.
of up, down, left, and right keys
with a ↵ ENTER button in the
center for selection.
Soft Keys Check the labels on the footer of the UI screen.
There is a LEFT and RIGHT The meaning of the soft keys will vary.
SOFT key on the sides of the
navigational menus. The labels
on the footer of the UI will
explain their function.
NOTE: The printer is shipped with the ENTER button locked. To unlock, press the UP+DOWN arrow keys
simultaneously until you see the message “ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED”.
Operating Modes
The operating mode can be selected through the control panel keys or can result from routine operations
such as powering on the printer.
Online: In ONLINE mode, the printer can receive and print data sent from the host. Pressing the PAUSE
key toggles the printer between the ONLINE and OFFLINE modes. The Status LED indicator is on.
Offline (Home): When the printer goes OFFLINE, the Status LED is off and the UI is in Home Screen. From the
Home Screen, the user has three different icons to choose from: 1) Wizard, 2) Settings, and 3) Calibrate. The
green highlighted icon is the current selection. Pressing the PAUSE key toggles the printer from Home
Screen to ONLINE mode.
Settings: When Settings is chosen from the Home Screen, the user has access to the printer menus by
navigating icons and traversing menu lists. Configurations can be saved using the Configs icon or by use of
the Auto-Save feature when returning ONLINE.
Wizard: When Wizard is chosen from the Home Screen, the user can perform different areas of printer setup
with the help of detailed explanations, references to online videos, and other material. On the first power-cycle,
the user will automatically be taken into the Printer Setup Wizard.
Fault: In fault mode, a fault condition exists that must be cleared before printing can continue. The Status
LED indicator flashes, and the UI shows the Fault screen.
Before normal printing can continue, the fault must be corrected, the message cleared by pressing the
PAUSE key, and the printer placed ONLINE.
Page | 23
Online Screen
When the printer is ONLINE and ready to receive data, the ONLINE screen is shown. By default, this will
be the first screen the user sees after the power-up process has completed. In order to demonstrate the
full features of the ONLINE Screen, the following options are assumed:
• Model T820 (203 DPI)
• Network is installed and IP is set
• Wi-Fi is installed and IP is set
• The printer has a Network Printer Name
• The Media > Handling > Print Mode is set to Transfer (ribbons).
• RFID and Bluetooth are installed and enabled
• The Active Configuration has been saved under a custom name “Warehouse”
• The menu option under System > Control > Batch Counter is enabled.
The illustration above has labels associated with each of the ONLINE screen features which are
described in the table below. Notice there are differences for the wired Ethernet and wireless ONLINE
screens.
Item Description
1 The full model name includes the printer width and DPI.
The Network Printer Name can be set via telnet, SNMP, or the webpage
2
and is used with Ethernet or WLAN features.
3 The Ethernet IP address is displayed if the IP address is set (non-zero).
4 The active IGP Emulation and the active Host IO (based on last job).
This area is reserved for messages such as receiving data, batch
5
counters, and job status.
The Bluetooth icon will show when the Bluetooth option is installed and
6
active. If installed but not active it will be shown in light gray color.
The RFID icon will show when the RFID option is installed and active. If
7
installed but not active it will be shown disabled.
8 The last loaded configuration is referred to as the “Active Config”.
The print head gauge is used to show how much of the print head has
9
been used in relationship to the warranty.
10 The ribbon gauge is used when a ribbon is installed (thermal transfer).
Page | 24
Item Description
The WLAN IP address is displayed if the IP address is set (non-zero).
11
There is also a signal strength indicator next to the WLAN address.
12 The WLAN signal strength is displayed in dBm
13 The WLAN active channel
14 The WLAN SSID
If there is a warning that needs to be displayed while ONLINE, a popup message will come onto the
screen. For example, entering Power-Saver mode, Print Head Hot, etc.
Offline (Home) Screen

When the printer is taken OFFLINE using the PAUSE Key , the UI will show the Home screen.
The Home screen will be the first screen seen by the user when transitioning from ONLINE to OFFLINE.
The right corner of the header may include the symbol in case there are faults in the system not yet
cleared.
Using the navigational keys, the user can move among three options:
• Wizard – Provides Setup Instruction, Web Resources, and other links to the Printronix website via QR
barcodes for Product Support.
• Settings – Provides access to the printer menu system for configuration.
• Calibrate – Makes Calibration convenient and easy to perform when media or ribbon are installed.
There are also functions for the LEFT and RIGHT SOFT keys. The LEFT SOFT key “Cancel Data” is
present if there is data within the buffer and the setting System > Control > Cancel Operation is enabled.
The RIGHT SOFT key labeled “Info” will show the current configuration as text on the UI and the user can
scroll through the data and/or print if desired.
Wizard
The Wizard has several resources available as shown in the next figures. The greatest benefit of the
Wizard is the first subcategory “Wizards”. By highlighting this category (green) and pressing ENTER or
the RIGHT ARROW key, the user can then select the Wizard of choice to run:
• Printer Setup will help the user choose the proper display language, install ribbon & media, set media
and sensor options, calibrate, and run a test pattern to verify the product is working properly.
• Print Quality helps the user adjust the printer mechanically, and set Print Speed and Intensity of the
printer. A test printout helps the user in making the choices.
• Application helps the user setup the menu configuration particular to their label or application coming
from the host system.
Page | 25

When a Wizard has been completed (all steps executed until the end), the user is required to save their
configurations per usual procedure (see Configuration). The exception to this is the first time the printer is
powered up; in this case, the user is automatically taken into the Printer Setup Wizard and the
configuration is automatically saved to Config 1 when completed.
The Wizard also has support available in the form of QR barcodes for the other categories such as “Web
Links”, “Order Supplies”, etc. These QR barcodes provide links to the company website to view online
videos, manuals, drivers, including places where they can order supplies and register their product.
Settings
The Settings section of the menu represents the heart of the OFFLINE process in which users will peruse
the full menu set, edit menus, run diagnostics, and save configurations. The Settings section begins with
two pages of ICONs that can be selected using the navigational keys and the ENTER button.
NOTE: The printer is shipped with the ENTER button locked. To unlock, press the UP+DOWN arrow keys
When an ICON is selected, the user moves into the View Level in which the screen is divided with the
submenus on the left and the menu subsections on the right. As they traverse the submenus using the
Page | 26
up/down arrow keys, the menu subsections on the right change so that users can quickly see the menu
contents.
To view the full contents of a particular subsection or edit their menus, the user can either press ENTER
or use the RIGHT ARROW key to get into the Edit Level. Conversely, the user can hit the LEFT ARROW
key to return to the previous screen.
When in the Edit Level, the user can scroll the menus and their values using the up/down arrow keys. The
user can edit any menu that has the icon by pressing the ENTER key, changing the value, and
confirming their change using the “Apply” soft key on the right. There is also a “Cancel” soft key on the
left, if the user does not want to accept the change.
If the menu has a bolt icon, this is an executable menu and pressing the ENTER key will result in a
particular action (e.g., running a print test, clearing statistics). If the menu does not have any icon, then it
is a read-only menu and pressing ENTER key will not have any effect.
Page | 27
Calibrate
Calibration must be performed whenever new media or ribbon is installed or any configuration parameter
that affects sensors is modified. Selecting this shortcut ICON and pressing the ENTER key will activate
the Auto-Calibrate function, also available in Sensors > Calibrate > Auto Calibrate.
Fault
When faults occur, the user will be notified with the following screen on the display. The red color is used
to make a clear indication that the printer needs attention.
Users can follow the simple instructions shown in the screen or request additional help with the faults by
using the RIGHT SOFT key “Fault Help” if available. When Fault Help is selected, the user will be
provided a set of screens to help them through the process. However, Fault Help is only offered for faults
that are complex or require several steps with the printer mechanism.
The user can also choose via the LEFT SOFT key to go the “Home” screen, then to the Settings or
Wizard sections to adjust menu values (e.g., change media parameters, load Configs, etc.).
NOTE: The icon will be shown in the upper right corner as a reminder there is a fault that needs
to be cleared. Even when the user has completed all the steps necessary, the icon may
continue to be shown. Some faults are self-clearing in the OFFLINE state while other faults
are cleared only when returning ONLINE. If any fault was not successfully cleared, the Fault
screen shown above will reappear when the user attempts to return ONLINE.
Job in Process
There is no dedicated LED or status indicator for Job in Process. Users will know the printer is receiving
data instead via messages in the circled portion of the ONLINE screen as shown below.
When the printer is in ONLINE mode and data is being received and being processed, the message “Job
in Process” will be shown in the message area. After the job has been printed the message will go away.
If the user is printing in batch mode and the option System > Control > Batch Counter is enabled, the
page count will have priority over the ‘Job in Process’ message.
When the printer is in OFFLINE mode and in the Home screen, the LEFT SOFT key will be labeled
“Cancel Data” if there is Data in Buffer when the printer is taken OFFLINE. If there is no Data in Buffer, then
Page | 28
the LEFT SOFT key label will not show anything. In order for the Cancel Data operation to be available, the
menu System > Control > Cancel Operation must be enabled.
Media Handling Modes

Depending on the media handling options installed, there are up to four modes that can be selected. The
factory default is Tear-Off Strip.
• Tear-Off Strip. Prints on the media and sends it out the front until the print buffer is empty. It then
positions the trail edge of the last label over the tear bar for removal.
• Continuous. Prints on the media and sends it out the front of the printer.
• Peel-Off. When the optional peel-off assembly is installed, the printer prints and peels die-cut labels
from the liner without user assistance. A “Remove Label” message will display to remind you to
remove the label before the next one can be printed. For more information, see Label Peel-Off.
• Cut. When the optional media cutter is installed, the printer automatically cuts media after each label
is printed or can cut the media after a specified number of labels have been printed using the Active
IGP Emulation cut command.
Once you have decided on the mode, configure the printer.
Setting Up the Printer

This section describes the procedures for loading various types of ribbon and media.
The term “media” in this manual refers to all the different kinds of paper, label, or tag stock material that
can be printed on by the printer. Your thermal printer can print on continuous paper, adhesive backed labels,
or non-adhesive tags packaged in roll or fanfold form.
For clarity, all operator touch points are blue in color.
IMPORTANT For best result, use only genuine Printronix supplies. See “Supplies and
Accessories”.
CAUTION Do not wear rings or other metallic objects while servicing any interior area of
the printer.
CAUTION DO NOT TOUCH the printhead or the electronic components under the pivoting
deck. The discharge of electrostatic energy that accumulates on the surface of
the human body or other surfaces can damage or destroy the printhead or
electronic components used in this device.
CAUTION Do not close the pivoting deck without label stock installed between the
printhead and the platen, because debris on the platen may damage the
printhead.
IMPORTANT Adhesive backed labels that DO NOT lay flat on the liner can jam the printer. This
can cause the label to peel off the liner. The exposed edges can stick to the label
guides and rollers inside the printer.
If you run out of labels while printing, do not turn off the printer while reloading
labels, because you can lose data.
Loading Ribbon
Page | 29
For direct thermal media (no ribbon required), go to “Loading Media” section.
IMPORTANT Clean the printhead, platen roller, and media sensors every time you change the
ribbon. See Cleaning the Printhead, Platen Roller, Media Sensors/Damper.
1. Open the printer top cover by pulling the blue levers, located on each side, toward the front of the printer,
then lift the top cover.
2. T800 supports 3 kinds of paper core for ribbon.
 For 1 inch paper core without notches, please insert the ribbon spindles into the paper core and
ribbon.
Note: Please follow the direction when
installing the ribbon spindle.
 For 1 inch & 0.5 inch paper core with notches, do not need to install the ribbon spindles.
3. Install the paper core and ribbon to the hubs. For 0.5 or 1 inch paper roll with notches on both sides,
please insert them at the hubs directly.
Page | 30
Paper core for
rewinding the used
ribbon
Ribbon
Note: Please insert the right side of spindle

first. Then, insert the left side to the
hole at the left side of the blue hub.
4. Pull the leader of the ribbon through the print head and stick the leader of the ribbon onto the ribbon
rewind paper core.
5. Turn the blue ribbon rewind hub until the ribbon plastic leader is thoroughly wound and the black
section of the ribbon covers the print head.
Page | 31
Loading Media
1. Open the printer top cover by pulling the blue levers , located on each side, toward the front of the
printer, then lift the top cover.
Page | 32
2. Separate and hold open the blue media holders.
3. Place the roll between the holders and close them onto the core.
4. Separate the blue media guides.
Black mark
sensor
Media guide RFID antenna

slide (if equipped)
Note:
 For black mark media or media with notch or holes used to indicate label length, the blue Black
Mark sensor is moveable. Slide it to correct position for detecting.
 For RFID model, slide the blue antenna slide to the correct position.
Page | 33
5. Place the paper, printing side face up, through the media sensor and place the label leading edge
onto the platen roller. Move the blue media guides to fit the label width.
6. Press down on both sides of the top cover to close it gently.
7. Initiate Auto Calibrate via the Home Screen ICON , selecting this shortcut ICON and pressing the
ENTER key will activate the Auto-Calibrate function. Calibration may also be activated via the
Sensors menus within the Settings section (Sensors > Calibrate > Auto Calibrate).
Note: Calibration must be performed whenever new media or ribbon is installed or any configuration
parameter that affects the sensors is modified.
Your printer is equipped with media sensors that detect the top-of-form position on media with label
length indicators (gaps, notches, holes, or black marks). These sensors also detect when a Paper Out
condition exists.
Page | 34
Loading External Media
If using either an external media holder or folded labels, feed the media through the rear external label
entrance chute.
1. Open the printer top cover by pulling the blue levers, located on each side, toward the front of the
2. Separate and hold open the media holders.
3. Set the media holder lock switch to down to keep the media holders separated.
4. Feed the paper from rear external label entrance chute, printing side face up, through the media
sensor and place the label leading edge onto the platen roller. Move the media guides to fit the label
width.
5. Press down on both sides of the top cover to close it gently.
6. Initiate Auto Calibrate via the Home Screen ICON , selecting this shortcut ICON and pressing the
ENTER key will activate the Auto-Calibrate function or initiate calibration via the Sensors menus
Page | 35
within the Settings section (Sensors > Calibrate > Auto Calibrate).
Positioning the Media Sensors

Your printer is equipped with two media sensors that detect the top-of-form position on media with label
length indicators (gaps, notches, holes, or black marks). These sensors also detect when a Paper Out
condition exists. You may select via the Control Panel which sensor will be used, based on the type of
media to be printed.
Gap sensor
(Transmitter)
Black Mark sensor
(Transmitter &
Receiver)
Gap sensor (Receiver)
Black Mark Sensor (Moveable/ Reflective) Gap Sensor (Fixed/ Transmissive)

The black mark sensor position is moveable. The gap sensor is in a fixed position in the
Move the triangular mark (▽ ) directly into the center, covering an offset 4 mm to right or 7 mm
path of the black mark on the underside of the to left from center. The default is located in
media, or extraneous cut-out (notch or hole) to be center of offset 4 mm. Please make sure the
used for detection. Please make sure there is no media has no vertical gap, rounded die-cut label
dark pre-printing or RFID tags that could cause corners or dark pre-printing that could cause
false black mark detection or paper out faults false gap detection or paper out faults.
within the path of the sensor.
Avoid Dark
Pre-printing
Extraneous
Cut-out
Vertical Gap and

Page | 36 Rounded Die-cut Label
Corners
Sensing Different Media Types
The printer’s media sensors can detect the different types of label length indicators on a large variety of
media types. This is accomplished by selecting the correct sensor option: Gap, Mark, or Disable under
Sensors > Control > Gap/Mark Sensor menu or within the “Printer Setup” Wizard.
1. Press the PAUSE key to place the printer OFFLINE (Home Screen).
2. Find the Settings ICON and press ENTER.
3. Press the UP + DOWN ARROW keys together until “ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED” displays.
4. Find the Sensors ICON and press ENTER.
5. Select the “Control” submenu and press ENTER.
6. Find the “Gap/Mark Sensor” option and press ENTER to edit this menu. Find the option that matches
the type of label length indicators on the installed media displays:
Disable. Select when using media with no label length indicators (no gaps, notches, holes, or black
marks) or when you want the printer to ignore all existing label length indicators on the installed media.
Mark. Select when using media that has horizontal black marks located on the underside of the label
liner or tag stock or when using media with notches or holes as label length indicators.
Gap. Select when using media with a liner space between die-cut labels or has horizontal black marks
located on the topside of the label.
NOTE: When you select Disable, the length of each label is based on the Media > Image > Label Length
menu or the value sent via host software.
NOTE: If the printer detects a false PAPER OUT message when you change to Gap or Mark sensing
or vice-versa, find the Home Screen and run Calibrate
7. Press ENTER to enable the displayed option or use the RIGHT SOFT key labeled “Apply”. An asterisk
(*) appears next to the selection.
8. Press the PAUSE key or the LEFT SOFT key labeled “Home” to return to the Home Screen.
9. Review Media with Gaps
10.
1. Media with a horizontal liner space between die-cut labels or horizontal black marks located on the
upper side of the label liner.
2. Select “Gap” in the Sensors > Control > Gap/Mark Sensor menu.
3. Perform an Auto Calibrate. See Running Auto Calibrate on page 39.
11. Calibrating the Media Sensors on page 38. Perform the Auto Calibrate procedure per Running Auto
Calibrate on page 39.
Page | 37
Sensors > Control > Gap/Mark Sensor
The available options specify the sensor type needed for detecting the Top-
of- Form position on media with label length indicators (gaps, notches,
holes, or black marks).
Select when using media with no label length

indicators (no gaps, notches, holes, or black marks),
Disable
or when you want the printer to ignore all existing
label length indicators on the installed media.
Select when using media that has horizontal black

marks located on the underside of the label liner or
Mark
tag stock. Also used for tag stock with notches, or
holes used as label length indicators.
Select when using media with a horizontal liner space

Gap between die-cut labels or horizontal black marks
located on the upper side of the label liner.
Media with No Label Length Indicators

1. When using media without label length indicators (no gaps, notches, holes, or marks) or when you want
to ignore all existing length indicators, place the triangle mark ▽ on the media sensor assembly in the
center of the media so it can detect when a Paper Out condition exists.
2. Select “Disable” in the Sensors > Control > Gap/Mark Sensor menu. See Section “Sensors > Control”.
3. Perform an Auto Calibrate.
Media with Underside Horizontal Black Marks

1. Position the triangle mark ▽ on the media sensor assembly in the center of the horizontal black marks
located on the underside of media.
2. Select “Mark” in the Sensors > Control > Gap/Mark Sensor menu.
3. Perform an Auto Calibrate.
Media with Gaps, Notches or Holes
1. Position the triangle mark ▽ on the media sensor assembly in the path of the gaps, notches, or holes
in media.
2. Select “Mark” in the Sensors > Control > Gap/Mark Sensor menu.
Media with Gaps
4. Media with a horizontal liner space between die-cut labels or horizontal black marks located on the
upper side of the label liner.
5. Select “Gap” in the Sensors > Control > Gap/Mark Sensor menu.
Page | 38
Calibrating the Media Sensors
Due to manufacturing differences in media, the media sensors may have difficulty differentiating between
the label and the liner or the label and the black mark. When this occurs, the printer may intermittently skip
a label or display a fault message such as “GAP NOT DETECTED” or “PAPER OUT”.
Media sensor sensitivity and reliability can be improved by changing the Sensors > Control > Gap/Mark
Thresh and/or Sensors > Control > Paper Out Thresh values. You can change these values manually or
automatically by performing an Auto Calibrate or Manual Calibrate procedure from the Sensors >
Calibrate menu section. (The changes take effect immediately within the current configuration menu.)
Auto or Manual Calibrate is completed successfully when the displayed Sensed Distance value correctly
matches that of the installed media. When Gap is selected, the Sensed Distance should match the length
from the trailing edge of one gap to the trailing edge of the next gap (or one label + one gap). When Mark is
selected, the Sensed Distance should match the length from the leading edge of one black mark to the
leading edge of the next black mark.
When you have completed Auto or Manual Calibrate, you can verify the new values are correct by pressing
the FEED key several times. Each time you press FEED, media advances one label and stops at the correct
Top-of-Form position of the next label.
Once you confirm the correct values, save them to the desired configuration menu before powering off the
printer.
Running Auto Calibrate

You can initiate Auto Calibrate via the Home Screen ICON or via the Sensors menus within the
Settings section.
NOTE: Verify that the Gap/Mark Sensor option (Gap, Mark, or Disable) matches the installed media.
Check that the media sensors are horizontally positioned to permit sensing of the label length
indicators. See Positioning the Media Sensors.
Make sure the Media > Image > Label Length value matches the physical length of the installed
media. Entering the correct length forces the printer to advance media far enough during
calibrate for long labels (so actual gaps, notches, and marks can be detected) and reduce the
amount of media advanced for short labels.
If you try to do an Auto Calibrate when Peel-Off Media Handling is enabled, the LCD will
display “CANNOT CALIBRATE” error. Before you can do an Auto Calibrate, you must select
another media handling mode.
2. Select the Calibrate ICON and press the ENTER key.
3. Media advances until it can accurately detect the label length indicators and then stops at the Top-of-
Form position. The Sensed Distance value will then display for one second.
4. Auto Calibrate is successful when the Sensed Distance value correctly matches that of the installed
media:
Gap/Mark Sensor = Gap: The Sensed Distance value is the physical length of one label plus the
length of one gap, notch, or hole.
Gap/Mark Sensor = Mark: The Sensed Distance value is the physical distance from the leading edge
of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark.
Gap/Mark Sensor = Disable: Not applicable. If Gap/Mark Sensor is set to Disable, the Sensed Distance
value will not be updated.
If “GAP NOT DETECTED” displays, run Auto Calibrate again.
Page | 39
If Auto Calibrate continues to end with an incorrect Sensed Distance value displayed or a fault message
displayed, refer to Running Manual Calibrate on page 42.
NOTE: The amount of media sampled during Auto Calibrate is based on the length of a label and
transitions detected, without error, between a label and its label length indicators.
5. Press the FEED key several times. Each time you press FEED, the media advances one label length and
stops.
NOTE: After a form feed, the position of the leading edge of the next label depends on the type of
Media Handling mode selected under Media > Handling > Media Handling menu. Tear-Off Strip
Media Handling will position the label edge at the tear bar, while Continuous will position the
label edge under the printhead.
6. Once the Sensed Distance value is confirmed, you can save them to a desired configuration menu
before powering off the printer or you can press the PAUSE key and the printer will automatically display
a reminder message that your changes have not been saved and to select one of four possible choices.
7. Once completed the printer will go ONLINE.
Running Media Profile

The Media Profile printout shows the relationship of the Paper Out Threshold and the Gap/Mark
Threshold values, illustrates if and when each label length indicator is detected, and shows the difference
between the label length indicators and the label. The profile printout (shown here) helps you set the
thresholds for difficult media. This includes pre-printed labels and labels with poor gap/media dynamic
range.
Once Media Profile is initiated, the printer will continue to advance media and print the profile in
landscape orientation until you press ENTER to stop printing.
NOTE: Verify the Sensors > Control > Gap/Mark Sensor option (Gap, Mark, or Disable) matches the
installed media.
You will need a minimum installed label width of two inches to support the Profile printout.
Ensure the media sensors are horizontally positioned to permit sensing of the label length
indicators. Positioning the Media Sensors.
Ensure the Media > Handling > Print Mode option matches the media installed. Select “Direct”
for heat sensitive media (no ribbon required) or “Transfer” for thermal transfer media (ribbon
required).
3. Press the up and down arrow keys together until “ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED” displays.
5. Select the “Diagnostic” submenu and press ENTER.
6. Find “Media Profile/Profile Print” and then press ENTER to start the profile printing process.
The printer will advance media and continue to print a dynamic profile image depicting the
relationship of the label and any label length indicators detected.
7. Press ↵ ENTER to stop the profile printing.
NOTE: The Gap/Mark and Paper Out Threshold values shown on the Profile printout represent the
last values determined from a successful Auto or Manual Calibrate or the factory default
Page | 40
values if no Auto or Manual Calibrate was performed.
Figure 1 Media Profile Printout
Gap Sensing
This figure shows a Media Profile printout of a RFID label where the Gap/Mark Sensor is set to Gap in the
Sensors > Control menu.
In this example, the gap threshold value the printer selected (represented by the Gap/Mark dotted line) is
too close to the value seen for the RFID antenna. This may cause the printer to falsely use the antenna as
the gap (top-of-form).
NOTE: Refer to the RFID Labeling Reference Manual for full details on how to set up the printer to
properly run RFID labels.
Page | 41
To avoid this problem, increase the Threshold Range value to 60% or 70% in the Sensors > Calibrate>
Threshold Range (the default is 50%), then perform a Running Auto Calibrate page 39.
Any changes to Threshold Range will not take effect until you run an Auto Calibrate again.
This will raise the Gap/Mark threshold high enough so that the printer will not falsely use the antenna as
the gap (top-of-form).
Running Manual Calibrate

Manual Calibrate should be performed only when the values derived from Auto Calibrate fail to improve
the media sensors’ ability to sense label length indicators on the installed media. Manual Calibrate is
located in the Sensors > Diagnostics section.
NOTE: Verify the Gap/Mark Sensor option (Gap, Mark, or Disable) matches the installed media.
Ensure the media sensors are horizontally positioned to permit sensing of the label length
indicators.
Ensure the Media > Handling > Print Mode option matches the media installed. Select “Direct”
for heat sensitive media (no ribbon required) or “Transfer” for thermal transfer media (ribbon
required).
If you try to do a Manual Calibrate when Peel-Off Media Handling is enabled, the LCD will
display a “CANNOT CALIBRATE” error. Before you can do a Manual Calibrate, you must
select another media handling mode.
3. Press the up and down arrow keys together until “ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED” displays.
Page | 42
5. Select the “Diagnostics” submenu and press ↵ ENTER.
6. Find “Manual Calibrate” and then press ↵ ENTER to start the process.
7. Follow the instructions displayed on the LCD and press the ↵ ENTER key to move to the next step.
8. During the last step of Manual Calibrate, the printer will advance the media and attempt to detect the
label length indicators and stop at the Top-of-Form position. The Sensed Distance value will then
display for one second. The calibrate is successful when the Sensed Distance value correctly matches
that of the installed media. If “CALIBRATION FAIL” error displays, run Manual Calibrate again.
NOTE: The amount of media sampled during Manual Calibrate is based on the length of a label and
the transitions detected without error, between a label and its label length indicators.
10. Press the FEED key several times. Each time you press FEED, the media advances one label length
and stops.
NOTE: After a form feed, the position of the leading edge of the next label depends on the type of
Media Handling mode selected via Media > Handling > Media Handling. Tear-Off Strip Media
Handling positions the label edge at the tear bar, while Continuous positions the label edge
under the printhead.
11. Once the correct values are confirmed, save them to the desired configuration menu before powering
off the printer.
Page | 43
Label Peel-Off (Optional)
You can set up the printer to automatically peel die-cut labels off their liner (backing) and dispense them
one at a time while rewinding the liner. For installation information, refer to Appendix D.
Loading Media Using Peel-Off Mode

1. Please follow Loading Media on page 32 above to load the media and calibrate the sensors before
the next step to avoid paper jams.
2. Open the peel-off front door.
3. Thread the media (label and liner) over the tear bar and around the peel-off roller, then through the
opening at the bottom of the front door. The label liner will be fed to the floor.
Page | 44
4. Close the peel-off front door.
5. Press down on both sides of the top cover to close.
Configuring the Printer Menu

2. Set Media Handling to “Peel-Off” within the Application Wizard or directly in Media > Handling > Media
Handling menu.
3. Back to ONLINE.
4. The printer is ready on Label Peel-Off Mode.
5. Press the FEED key. The label advances to the peel-off position, and “Remove Label” displays on the
LCD.
6. Manually remove the peeled label from the printer.
Page | 45
Media Cutter (Optional)
You can set up the printer to automatically cut printed media when the media exits the printer. For
installation information, refer to Appendix C.
Loading Media Using Cutter Mode

1. Please follow "Loading Media" above to load the media and calibrate the sensors before the next step
to avoid paper jams.
2. Thread the media through the opening at the media cutter.
Configuring the Printer Menu

2. Set Media Handling to “Cut” within the Application Wizard or directly in Media > Handling > Media
Handling menu.
3. Back to ONLINE.
4. The printer is ready on Cut Mode.
5. Press FEED key to test.
Page | 46
Printing Adjustments
Printhead Burn Line Adjustment

The print head burn line adjustment are used to fine tune the print quality for different thicknesses of
media. Adjust the print head’s burn line forward or backward as it relates to the platen roller.
The print head burn line default is set for general purpose printing media (plain paper and paper thickness
less than 0.20mm). In general, print head burn line adjustment will not be required. If you have poor print
quality, please try changing the print speed or print intensity first, before moving the burn line.
Poor print quality when using paper thicker than 0.20mm may be due to the print head burn line not being
at the optimized position. Please refer to the steps below to improve the print quality.
1. Open the printer to remove the front cover.
2. Adjust the knobs on right and left sides to get your best print quality. There are 7 levels of adjustment.
Adjust both knobs to the same level. The default setting is 4.
3. Adjust the burn line position and test print as necessary until the printed image is clear.
4. Re-install the front cover after adjusting.
Page | 47
Cleaning
Depending on the media used, the printer may accumulate residues (media dust, adhesives, etc.) as a
by-product of normal printing. To maintain top printing quality, you should remove these residues by
cleaning the printer periodically.
WARNING Set the printer power switch to O (Off) prior to performing any cleaning tasks.
Leave the power cord connected to keep the printer grounded and to reduce
the risk of electrostatic damage.
IMPORTANT When the printer is powered Off, menu settings that were changed and not
saved and any print data remaining in the print buffer will be lost. To prevent
the loss of recent menu changes, see Configuration setting on page 51.
CAUTION • Do not wear rings or other metallic objects while cleaning any interior area of
the printer.
• Use only the cleaning agents recommended in this section. Use of other
cleaners may damage the printer and void its warranty.
• Do not spray or drip liquid cleaning solutions directly into the printer. Apply
the solution on a clean lint-free cloth and then apply the dampened cloth to the
printer.
• Do not use canned air in the interior of the printer as it can blow dust and
debris onto sensors and other critical components.
• Only use a vacuum cleaner with a nozzle and hose that are conductive and
grounded to drain off static build up.
• All reference in these procedures for use of isopropyl alcohol requires that a
99% or greater isopropyl alcohol content be used to reduce the risk of
moisture corrosion to the printhead.
Exterior Cleaning
Clean the exterior surfaces with a clean, lint-free cloth. If necessary, use a mild detergent or desktop
cleaning solution.
Interior Cleaning
Clean the interior of the printer by removing any dirt and lint with a vacuum cleaner, as described above,
or use a brush with soft non-metallic bristles.
Cleaning the Printhead, Platen Roller, Media Sensors/Damper

NOTE: Even though the printhead, platen roller, media sensors and media damper are individually
listed in these cleaning procedures, debris and adhesive on these components can ultimately
travel to the printhead area and therefore should be cleaned and examined each time the
printhead is cleaned and in the order shown.
Printhead Cleaning
As you use your printer, the printhead may become dirty with ribbon residue and label adhesives which
can result in poor print quality. Keeping the printhead clean will help maintain its life.
• Cleaning Agent - Clean the printhead using a Printhead Cleaning Pen, Printronix PN 203502-
002 or an Isopropyl Alcohol Wipe, Printronix PN 254945-901.
• Schedule - Clean the printhead each time you install a new roll of ribbon (thermal transfer print
mode) or when you install a new roll or box of media (direct thermal print mode).
Page | 48
WARNING If you have just been printing, allow one minute for the printhead to cool
down to avoid burns from accidental printhead contact.
CAUTION • Avoid electrostatic damage to the printhead by first making hand contact with
an unpainted part of the printer frame or by using an anti-static wrist strap
grounded to the printer frame.
• Do not use hard, sharp or abrasive objects to remove residue from the
printhead.
• Do not touch the heating element surface of the printhead with your hands to
avoid printhead corrosion. Any accidental skin contact with the element surface
should be immediately followed by a thorough cleaning with a Printhead
Cleaning Pen or an Isopropyl Alcohol Wipe.
• The heating element surface should be free from any condensation to avoid
corrosion.
1. Remove the media and ribbon, if installed.
2. Clean the printhead by gently rubbing an Isopropyl Alcohol Wipe or the felt tip of a Printhead Cleaning
Pen across the print heads’ light-brown heating elements area. Allow the printhead to dry for one minute
before reloading ribbon or media.
NOTE: Even after a thorough cleaning with a Printhead Cleaning Pen or Alcohol Wipe, you may still
see printouts with voids or streaks. This may be the result of baked-on ribbon resin that can be
hard to remove when normal cleaning cycles are not maintained. Try using a Thermal Printer
Cleaning Card 4”W x 6”L PN TSCCC-4-15. When using a cleaning card, follow the directions
on the packaging.
Platen Roller Cleaning

Label parts, media dust, and adhesive residue on the platen can degrade print quality and cause voids in
your label image.
• Cleaning Agent - Use an isopropyl alcohol wipe or small amount of isopropyl alcohol on a clean
cloth to clean the platen roller.
• Schedule - Clean the platen roller each time you clean the printhead.
1. Clean the platen roller by first removing any label parts from its surface by hand. Then use an isopropyl
alcohol wipe or clean cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol to remove any remaining paper dust, debris,
or label adhesive. The platen roller can be rotated forward by hand to access and clean its entire
surface area.
NOTE: Even though power is removed from the platen motor, some drag will be felt as you rotate the
platen.
2. Check the platen roller for razor cuts, nicks, and gouges that may cause voids in the printed image.
This type of damage usually requires platen roller replacement.
Media Sensor Cleaning

The upper and lower media sensors should be cleaned to ensure reliable Top of Form and Paper Out
sensing.
CAUTION Do not use isopropyl alcohol, solvents, or abrasive agents to clean the lower
media sensor as they can damage the sensors lens cover.
• Cleaning Agent - Use a brush with soft, non-metallic bristles or a vacuum cleaner, described above,
to remove paper dust.
Page | 49
NOTE: An Isopropyl Alcohol Wipe or Printhead Cleaning Pen can be used to remove label adhesive
from the upper sensor.
• Schedule - Clean the media sensors each time you clean the printhead.
1. Brush away or vacuum any dust or debris from the upper and lower sensor before using the cleaning
pen or wipe.
Cutter Option Cleaning

The cutter requires only periodic cleaning.
WARNING Keep your fingers away from the cutter blades. They are sharp.
Perform the following procedure whenever too much dust or debris is visible.
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
2. Place the cutter in the down (open) position.
3. Use a vacuum or can of compressed air with a nozzle around the area of the cutter blade to remove
any dust or debris.
4. Use a cloth with a light amount of WD-40 oil to clean adhesive from the cutter blade and upper or
lower stainless steel cutter guides. Adhesive oil must be cleaned from the blade and guides with a dry
cloth to prevent dust attraction.
CAUTION Do not use isopropyl alcohol to clean the cutter blade – it dissolves oils
required for lubrication.
5. Place the cutter in the up (closed) position.
6. Properly route the media through the printer and cutter.
7. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
8. Test the printer cutting operation by running a test print within the Tools > Print Tests > Run Test
menu.
Page | 50
3 Printer Settings
Overview
This chapter provides information about:
• Setting, saving, modifying, and printing configurations
• Structure of the configuration
• Menu and Configuration Parameters
Unlocking the Control Panel

Press the UP ARROW key and the DOWN ARROW key simultaneously to unlock the Control Panel. This
step is necessary to save any configurations.
Setting Printer Configuration Parameters

Configuration parameters are set from the control panel and stored into the printer’s flash memory. The
parameters define how the printer will respond to command and interface signals from the host computer.
The Settings section is where the complete set of menus and configuration parameters are located.
The T800 menu system is three levels deep and consists of the ICON Level, View Level, and Edit Level.
The ICON Level. The top level of the menu system is known as the ICON Level and consists of two screens
as shown below. The green shading shows the current icon selected. The arrow keys are used to select
different icons (and even move between screens).
IMPORTANT The RFID icon is grey to symbolize that these options are not installed. When
colored grey, an icon cannot be selected.
When the desired icon is highlighted, the user must press ↵ ENTER to move into the View Level.
The View Level. The 2nd level of the menu system is known as the View Level and is separated into a
left and right screen. On the left side are submenus, and on the right are the actual menus or
configuration parameters. The up/down arrow keys will move to different submenus (highlighted in green)
and the right side will show a preview of the configuration parameters available for that submenu.
Page | 51
When the desired submenu is highlighted, the user can press ↵ ENTER or the RIGHT ARROW key to move
into the Edit Level. Likewise, the user can use the LEFT ARROW key to move back to the ICON Level.
The Edit Level. The last level of the menu system is known as the Edit Level and contains all the
configuration parameters for a given submenu. The user can scroll through the menus using the up/down
arrow keys to view the current configuration values.
For menus that have the edit icon , the user can modify the value by pressing the ↵ ENTER key to enter
Edit Mode. If the menu has a bolt icon, this is an executable menu and pressing the ENTER key will
result in a particular action (e.g., running a print test, clearing statistics). If the menu does not have any icon,
then it is a read-only menu and pressing ENTER key will not have any effect.
IMPORTANT When entering the Edit Mode, a message “ENTER SWITCH LOCKED” may
appear. In this case, the user will not be allowed to enter Edit Mode until the
panel is unlocked. To unlock the configuration, press the UP+DOWN arrow keys
In the Edit Mode, depending on the type of menu, the user may be given a pull-down menu of options or
cycle through a set of numbers with an asterisk next to the current value. In cases where large numbers,
strings, or network IP addresses must be entered, a virtual keyboard will be shown in which users can
navigate to different characters or numbers. The examples below show Edit Mode with a pull-down menu
and a virtual keyboard.
Page | 52
When users are in Edit Mode, they can change to a new value by either pressing the ↵ ENTER key, or
using the RIGHT SOFT key to “Apply”. Likewise, the users can exit Edit Mode without any modification to
the menu by using the LEFT SOFT key to “Cancel” the operation.
For menus with an action icon , the user can execute the particular action by pressing the ↵ ENTER key.
For menus without any icon, these are read-only menus and cannot be modified.
IMPORTANT Some sensitive menu operations require the user to confirm they want to
proceed. For example, menu operations that clear logs, delete configuration,
delete files, etc. In these cases, a message will appear on the screen asking them
to confirm by pressing “OK” with one of the soft keys.
Users can return to the View Level by pressing the LEFT ARROW key or go to the Home menu screen
by using the LEFT SOFT key labeled “Home”.
NOTE: Changing menu values as described in this section only changes the Current Configuration.
The Current Configuration is stored in DRAM and is in effect only while the printer is powered
on. To store a configuration permanently into FLASH memory, see Configurations section on
page 51.
Saving a Configuration
When you make a change to the configuration menus, your changes reside in the Current Configuration
saved in DRAM. The Current Configuration is in effect while the printer is powered on.
If you want to save your configuration permanently into FLASH memory, then you have two options:
• Save the configuration by following the instructions within the Auto Save feature when you return to
the ONLINE state.
• Select the Configs icon under Settings and save the configuration with Configs > Control >
Save Config.
Your printer by default has a Factory Configuration. You can save up to eight different configurations to
meet unique print job requirements. Using the Configs > Control section, you can save, load, print, delete,
and choose which configuration will be active at power-up.
Page | 53
Auto Save Configuration
If you make any changes to the current configuration menu items and do not save them manually via the
Configs > Control > Save Config menu, you will be prompted to save the changes just before you place the
printer ONLINE with the screen shown below.
The Active Configuration is defined as the power-up configuration or last loaded configuration. There
are three possible cases with this choice depending on the state of the printer:
• If the Active Configuration is one of the eight user-defined configurations, the Active Configuration will
be saved and made the Power-Up Configuration.
• If the Active Configuration is the Factory Configuration, the printer will save the configuration to the
first free (unsaved) configuration and make that open configuration the Power-Up Config.
• If the Active Configuration is the Factory Configuration and there are no free (unsaved)
configurations, then the user will be informed with a message and asked to save the changes
manually. The printer will return to the Home Screen.
The Current Configuration is the configuration stored in DRAM. If the user selects this option, the
configuration will not be saved into FLASH memory permanently but will continue to be active.
The user also has the option of cancelling their changes by loading either the Active Configuration or the
Factory Configuration.
Once the selection is made, the user will return to the ONLINE state automatically.
Naming Configurations
You may specify a 15-character name which can be used to refer to a configuration in the Configs >
Custom section. The name you enter for a configuration will then be used everywhere within the
Config section. The names can be cleared by using the Configs > Custom > Reset Cfg Names menu.
Page | 54
When a configuration to name is selected, a virtual keyboard will be provided for the user to enter the
name desired. The navigation keys can be used to find characters with the ENTER button used to select
them. When the string is complete, the user should use the RIGHT SOFT key labelled “Apply”.
Loading a Configuration
You can specify any one of the nine configurations (1-8 or Factory) to load into DRAM using the Configs >
Control > Load Config menu. If the selected configuration has not been saved, the user will be warned
with a “CONFIG DOES NOT EXIST” message on the panel.Specifying a Power-Up Configuration
Specifying a Power-Up Configuration

You can specify any one of the nine configurations (1-8 or Factory) as the power-up configuration using
the Configs > Control > Power-Up Config menu. If the selected configuration has not been saved, the
user will be warned with a “CONFIG DOES NOT EXIST” message on the panel.
Modifying a Saved Configuration

Configurations can be modified and saved (updated) as often as desired. You can load a configuration of
choice with Configs > Control > Load Config, change the menu or configuration parameter of interest and
either use the Auto Save feature or return to the Configs > Control > Save Config menu to save the
changes.
Viewing the Current Configuration

The Current Configuration can be easily viewed on the control panel by selecting the RIGHT SOFT key
labeled “Info” on the Home screen. This will provide the same information in a Configuration Printout
except it is viewable on the control panel.
Page | 55
As can be seen from the picture, the user can scroll through the configuration values and choose to print
the configuration using the RIGHT SOFT key labelled “Print”.
Printing a Configuration
We recommend that you print and store all saved configurations for future reference. The printout
provides a list of the parameters that were set when you configured the printer. Configuration can be
printed using the Configs > Control > Print Config menu. That menu has the following options:
• Current (the default)
• Factory
• Power-Up
• All
• Saved Configurations 1-8
Page | 56
Settings Organization
This section will show how the configuration menus are organized under the icons in the Settings section.
Screen #1
Quick Setup Media Sensors

Media Image Control
Sensors Speed Calibrate
Application Handling Diagnostics
Configs Ribbon
Admin User Top of Form
Faults
Auto Label Map
System Host I/O Network

Control Control Control
Energy Star USB Ethernet3
Flash File View Serial WLAN2
Flash File Edit Bluetooth5 WLAN Params2
SD File View1 Host USB6 WLAN EAP2
SD File Edit1
USB File View1
USB File Edit1
Printer Mgmt
Date
Screen #2
Application RFID4 Tools

Control Control Print Tests
PGL … EGL Setup Tag Calibration Diagnostics
LP+ Setup Calibration Params Advanced
P-Series … Setup RFID Chip Params PTF Debug
Fonts Profiling Tools PTF Flags
Diagnostics Statistics
Statistics About
Configs
Control
Custom
NOTE:
1 The SD or USB related submenus will only show when installed.
2 WLAN is an option and these submenus are included only when WLAN is installed.
Page | 57
3 Ethernet menu is not available if WLAN option is installed unless an Ethernet cable is attached at
power-up.
4 RFID is only available when the RFID option is installed. Refer to the RFID Labeling Reference
Manual for information on these menus.

5 Bluetooth is an option and these submenus are included only when Bluetooth is installed.
6 These menus are only available when a Host USB HID device is installed such as a keyboard,
barcode reader, or scale.
Quick Setup
Quick Setup is a collection of the most typical setup parameters from different sections gathered in one
place. It is designed to help the users quickly find these parameters and get the printer installed and running.
There is also a feature called “Admin User” that administrators can use to restrict users to the Quick Setup
functionality and not allow them to go into the other sections. Under the Admin User subsection of Quick
Setup, the administrator can setup a password (1-10 digits) and enter “Safe Mode” which will then hide all
the other icons, leaving only Quick Setup. Safe Mode can only be disabled by entering the password.
Menu Items
The menu items under Quick Setup are the following:
Quick Setup Menu Description / Location of Menu

Media
Print Intensity Media > Image > Print Intensity
Print Speed Media > Speed > Print Speed
Media Handling Media > Handling > Media Handling
Paper Feed Shift Media > Image > Paper Feed Shift
Label Width Media > Image > Label Width
Label Length Media > Image > Label Length
Vertical Shift Media > Image > Vertical Shift
Horizontal Shift Media > Image > Horizontal Shift

Sensors
Gap/Mark Sensor Sensors > Control > Gap/Mark Sensor
Auto Calibrate Sensors > Calibrate > Auto Calibrate
Page | 58
Application
Active IGP Emul Application > Control > Active IGP Emul
XXX Diagnostics Application > Control > XXX Diagnostics
RFID Active* RFID > Control > RFID Active
* Menu available only when Option is installed

Configs
Save Config Configs > Control > Save Config
Power-Up Config Configs > Control > Power-Up Config
Load Config Configs > Control > Load Config

Admin User
Set Password Only available in Quick Setup when not in Safe Mode.
Enter Safe Mode Only available in Quick Setup when not in Safe Mode.
Exit Safe Mode Only available in Quick Setup when in Safe Mode.
Entering Safe Mode

Safe Mode is an optional feature that administrators can use to restrict access to the printer menus and
settings. The additional benefit of this mode is that once the complete setup has taken place, administrators
can enable this feature to make it easier for daily users to find and change the most typical menus.
By default, the printer is not in Safe Mode. The administrator enables Safe Mode by going into Quick Setup
> Admin Users section and doing the following:
• Setting up a Password via Quick Setup > Admin Users > Set Password.
• Entering Safe Mode via Quick Setup > Admin Users > Enter Safe Mode.
The password can be any string of 1-10 digits. See the screenshots below on how this is done and what to
expect. Note that once the password is set, it will display when not in Safe Mode.
Page | 59
Exiting Safe Mode
When the administrator wants to exit safe mode, they will also need to return to Quick Setup > Admin
Users section and enter the Password via Quick Setup > Admin Users > Exit Safe Mode. If the wrong
password is entered, the following screen be shown.
There is no lockout if you enter the wrong password several times, so you can continue to try. If you
cannot find or remember the password, then see section Forget the Password below.
Forgot the Password

If you forget the password to exit Safe Mode, then contact your Printronix Customer Support team for
more help unlocking the printer.
Page | 60
Media
IMPORTANT All distances under Media can be represented in inches or millimeters based
on the menu System > Control > Media Units.
Intro: Label Length

Understanding your media and application is very important when configuring the parameters in the menu
system. When setting label length, consider the following:
Label Length can be manually entered via the control panel Media > Image > Label Length menu or sent
via the host application (e.g., PGL job) using the appropriate software command. If sent via a software
command, that is referred to as a Host Forms Length or Logical Label Length.
A Host Forms Length (Label Length) value sent from the host computer can override Media > Image > Label
Length value if the emulation chooses to do so. Often, the emulations will have a menu to configure that
behavior (e.g., Application > PGL Setup > Host Form Length).
Physical Label Length is the actual measurable length of the label. The following list of different media
types explains how the physical label lengths are determined:
• Die-cut labels – measurable length of the removable label (leading edge to trailing edge). This does not
include the liner material or gap.
• Tag Stock with notches or holes – measurable length from the trailing edge of one notch or hole to the
leading edge of the next notch or hole.
• Tag Stock with black marks on underside – measurable length from the leading edge of one black mark
to the leading edge of the next black mark.
• Continuous media (no label length indicators) – measurable length should be within ± 1-2% the Label
Length value entered in the Media > Image > Label Length menu or the value sent via host software
command.
Logical Label Length (or Host Forms Length) is the length that a user or programmer bases his printable
image on. In most cases this length should be slightly less than the Physical Label Length. This allows the
entire image to be printed within the boundaries of the label length indicators (gaps, notches, holes, or black
marks).
When the Logical Label Length is greater than the Physical Label Length and Media > Image > Clip Page
is “Enable”, the printer will clip the bottom portion of the image that exceeds the Physical Label length. In
this case, the printable data that was not printed will be lost. There is more on Clip Page menu in the next
section.
Intro: Clip Page

The media sensor looks for the gap, notch, hole, or black mark only after the media has advanced the
distance specified by the Media > Image > Label Length menu or by the Host Forms Length coming from
the application. Any gaps, notches, holes, or black marks that exist prior to reaching the Label Length or
Host Forms Length value are ignored.
When Media > Image > Clip Page is “Disable”, Mark and Gap media sensing reliability can be improved and
the sensor problems described below can be fixed:
• The image starts to print at an erroneous distance from the top-of- form, especially towards the end
of a roll where the media is severely curled or scalloped.
• The image is incorrectly positioned as a result of the media sensor triggering off of a dark, pre-
printed image on the label or multiple gaps within the label.
• The printer starts to print one label and then another all on the same physical label, especially at
the end of a roll where the media is severely curled.
Page | 61
• An occasional blank label appears within a print job (in between printed labels).
When Clip Page is “Disable”, the printer ignores any pre-printed dark marks or multiple gaps on a label that
could mistakenly be detected as the next top-of-form position based on the specified Media > Image > Label
Length value.
IMPORTANT When Clip Page is “Disable”, the correct Media > Image > Label Length value must
be entered. If the value is too large, the printer will ignore the actual gap or mark
it needs to detect.
• When using Gap sensing, the Label Length value is equal to the physical length of a die cut or
removable label.
• When using Mark sensing, the Label Length value is the physical distance from the leading edge
of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark.
When the Logical Label Length is greater than the Physical Label Length and Clip Page is “Disable”, the
printer will continue to print the image onto the next physical label and ignore the gap or mark based on the
Media > Image > Label Length value.
When the Logical Label Length is less than the Physical Label Length, the printer will print the entire image
and leave blank space the remaining length of the physical label as it advances to the Top-of-Form of the
next label. This is true regardless of the Media > Image > Clip Page setting.
Media > Image
Media > Image > Print Intensity

This option specifies the level of thermal energy from the printhead to be used
for the type of media and ribbon installed. Large numbers imply more heat
(thermal energy) to be applied for each dot. This has a significant effect on
print quality. The print intensity and speed must match the media and ribbon
type to obtain the best possible print quality and barcode grades.
Minimum -15
Maximum +15
Factory Default -3
The actual print intensity is the sum of both the
Print Intensity menu and the Intensity Shift menu.
For example, if Print Intensity = 5 and Intensity
IMPORTANT Shift = -3, then the actual print intensity used is 2.
However, the actual intensity is bounded with a
minimum of -15 and maximum of 20.
Page | 62
Media > Image > Intensity Shift
This menu can be used to shift Print Intensity settings higher or lower. This
allows for higher print intensity settings for certain media while maintaining a
compatible Print Intensity value set by the host job. It can also be used to
make slight adjustments for compatibility with other emulations.
Minimum Lighter -9
Maximum Darker +9
Factory Default 0
While the shift can swing -9 to +9, the actual print
IMPORTANT intensity value is bounded with a minimum of -15
and maximum of 20.
Media > Image > Paper Feed Shift

This option represents the distance to advance (+ shift) or pull back (– shift)
the stop position of a label when Tear-Off Strip, Peel-Off, or Cut Media
Handling option is enabled. Allows .01 inch increments.
Minimum -1.00 inches
Maximum Current Label Length (or 12.80 inches maximum)
Factory Default 0.00 inches
The pull back (- shift) will be limited to the print
line position in order to prevent media from being
IMPORTANT pulled back beyond the print head and falling off
the platen roller.
Page | 63
Media > Image > Label Length
This option specifies the user-selected Label Length. In most applications,
the user-selected Label Length will match the physical label length. Physical
label length is the actual label length of the media installed:
Die-cut Labels: Measurable length of the removable label (leading edge to
trailing edge). This does not include the liner material or gap.
Tag Stock with notches or holes: Measurable length from the trailing edge of
one notch or hole to the leading edge of the next notch or hole.
Tag Stock with black marks on underside: Measurable length from the leading
edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark.
Continuous media (no label length indicators): Measurable length should be
within ± 1-2% the Label Length value here or the value sent via host software
command.
Minimum 0.1 inches
Maximum 50.0 inches
This menu can be overridden by the host job (Host

Form Length) and set to values that do not match
IMPORTANT the physical length. For a full description of how
Label Length behaves, see the section Intro: Label
Length on page 61.
Media > Image > Label Width

This option specifies the physical width of the image to be printed.
Minimum 0.1 inches
Maximum Maximum based on printer model/printhead.
Page | 64
Media > Image > Set Label Length
This feature selects whether the Sensed Distance value derived from an
Auto or Manual Calibrate will be used to set the Label Length menu. If no
calibration is performed, this menu has no effect.
The Sensed Distance will not override or change the

Manual
Label Length value.
The Sensed Distance value will override and change

the Label Length value. If Sensors Control >
Automatic
Gap/Mark Sensor = Gap, the printer will subtract the
Sensors > Calibrate > Gap Length value.
Factory Default Automatic
For Automatic setting, the Sensors > Calibrate >

IMPORTANT Use Label Length is ignored (treated as disabled).
Media > Image > Clip Page

This option determines how the printer handles images that are too large for
one physical page length when using gap or black mark media.
When the user-selected page length (logical length) is

greater than the physical page length dictated by the
Disable gap, notch, hole, or black mark on media, the printer
continues to print the remaining excess data onto the
next physical page.
The printer clips any excess data to fit the physical

page. The excess data is lost. The media sensor
Enable constantly looks for the gap, notch, hole, or black
mark and when detected, uses it as the TOF position
for the next label and clips any remaining data.
Factory Default Enable
See Intro: Clip Page 61 for more explanation when

IMPORTANT this menu option is disabled.
Media > Image > Vertical Shift

This option specifies the amount to shift an image vertically up (-) or down
(+) for precise positioning on the label. The actual height of the image is not
affected by this parameter. The adjustment is made in .01 inch increments.
Maximum Label Length (max 12.80 inches)
Page | 65
Media > Image > Horizontal Shift
This option specifies the amount to shift an image horizontally left (-) or right
(+) for precise positioning on the label. The actual width of the image is not
affected by this parameter. The adjustment is made in .01 inch increments.
Maximum 1.00 inches
Media > Image > Orientation

This menu item selects the image orientation to be used when printing the
label. See picture below for an illustration.
Portrait refers to vertical page orientation, where the

Portrait
top of the page is at the leading edge.
Landscape is a rotation of the logical page at 90

Landscape
degrees clockwise from Portrait.
Inverse Portrait is a rotation of the logical page at 180

Inv. Portrait
degrees from Portrait.
Inverse Landscape is a rotation of the logical page at

Inv. Landscape
270 degrees clockwise from Portrait.
Factory Default Portrait
The orientations shown here are with Print

Direction set to Head First. Some IGP Emulations
IMPORTANT such as ZGL use Foot First. In that case, the
orientations would be 180 degrees different for all
selections shown here.
Page | 66
Media > Image > Print Direction
This option is the compass for print orientation. Not all IGP Emulation
languages have the same definition of Portrait, Landscape, etc. The
illustration below shows how Portrait is defined for both Head First and
Foot First.
With Orientation set to Portrait, the top of the label will

Head First
come out of the printer first.
With Orientation set to Portrait, the bottom of the label

Foot First
will come out of the printer first.
Head First for PGL, but Foot First for ZGL. It will
Factory Default
automatically be set for plug’n play compatibility.
Print Direction will not change the orientation of

IMPORTANT any print test patterns in the Tools > Print Tests
menu.
Page | 67
Media > Image > Vertical DPI Adj
Adjusts the vertical print resolution. This can be used to compress or
expand all printed forms by small amounts.
195 (203 DPI)

Minimum
290 (300 DPI)
210 (203 DPI)

Maximum
310 (300 DPI)
Factory Default Match Head DPI
Media > Speed
Media > Speed > Print Speed

This option specifies the speed in inches per second (ips) at which the
media passes through the printer while printing.
Minimum 1 ips
T820: 8 ips
Maximum
T830: 6 ips
Factory Default 6 ips
Media > Speed > Reverse Speed

This option sets the speed at which the media moves in reverse direction.
Minimum 1 ips
T820: 8 ips
Maximum
T830: 6 ips
Factory Default 2 ips
Speeds above 2 ips may cause ribbon smudging
IMPORTANT depending on ribbon and media.
Page | 68
Media > Speed > Slew Speed Control
Controls how slew speed is chosen. By default, it will match Print Speed.
Automatic Always the same as the print speed.
Allows you to set the slew speed independently from
Manual Print Speed by unhiding the Media > Speed > Slew
Speed menu.
Factory Automatic
Media > Speed > Slew Speed

When the Media > Speed > Slew Speed Control is set to Manual, this menu
is unhidden. The range and defaults are consistent with Print Speed.
Minimum Same as Print Speed minimum
Maximum Same as Print Speed maximum
Factory Default Same as Print Speed
Only available when Media > Speed > Slew Speed
IMPORTANT Control is set to Manual.
Media > Handling
Media > Handling > Print Mode

This option specifies the type of printing to be done.
Transfer Indicates Thermal Transfer printing (ribbon installed).
Indicates Direct Thermal printing (no ribbon) and

Direct
requires special heat sensitive media.
Factory Default Transfer
Page | 69
Media > Handling > Media Handling
This option specifies how the printer will handle the media (labels or tag
stock).
Printer prints on the media and sends it out the front

Tear-Off Strip until the print buffer is empty, then positions the last
label over the tear bar for removal.
Prints and peels die-cut labels from the liner without

assistance. The printer waits for you to take away the
label before printing the next one (on-demand
printing). A “REMOVE LABEL” message will display
to remind you to remove the label before the next one
Peel-Off can be printed. See Label Peel-Off and Media >
Handling > Peel Present for more information.
The error message “INCOMPATIBLE WITH CUTTER”
displays if this mode is selected when the optional
cutter installed.
When the optional media cutter is installed, it

automatically cuts media after each label is printed or
after a specified number of labels have been printed
when a cut command from the host has been issued.
Cut It cuts continuous roll paper, labels, or tag stock.
The error message “OPTION NOT INSTALLED”
displays if this mode is selected when the optional
cutter is not installed.
Printer prints on the media and sends it out the front.

Continuous
See Media > Handling > Continuous Mode
Factory Default Tear-Off Strip
Page | 70
Media > Handling > Continuous Mode
Allows selection of special media modes when Continuous Media Handling
mode (Continuous Media) is selected.
Labels are printed and sent out the front. The cross
perforation following the last printed label is not
aligned at the tear bar. No auto feeding of a blank
label should exist between print jobs, but you may
Standard
need to press the FEED key to move
approximately .80 inches of the last printed label from
under the printhead. If performed, this feed causes a
blank label at the beginning of the next print job.
Same as Standard, but the cross perforation following

the last printed label is aligned at the tear bar. No
blank label is needed to remove the last printed label.
Tear-Off No blank label should exist between print jobs. A no
print zone, .80 inches long, exists from the leading
edge of each printed label. This option supports label
lengths 1.96” inches or longer.
Same as Standard, but the cross perforation following

the last printed label is automatically aligned at the
tear bar once the print buffer is empty for a period of
Tear-Strip Time. (Media does not get aligned at tear
bar until Tear-Strip Time expires.) When printable
Tear Strip Full data is again detected, a blank label is automatically
fed, resulting in one blank label between each print
job. This option supports label lengths 2.50 inches or
longer. Shorter label lengths cause two or more blank
labels to be automatically fed at the beginning of each
print job.
When Media Handling is set to Continuous and a

cutter is installed, Cut Strip will use the respective
host interface Timeout menu setting to determine the
End Of Job (EOJ) and cycle the cutter. That is, the
Cut Strip cutter will be cycled when there is no more data being
received from the host. The cut will not be done for
printing that is not initiated by the host such as form
feeds and test printing or if the host interface is not
set to Auto Switching.
Factory Default Standard
Page | 71
Media > Handling > Peel Present
This feature allows you to select which part of a label gets presented to the
peel bar.
Media is moved to next TOF after image printing

before presenting media to the peel-off position. This
Next TOF option is for standard labels where the gap/mark
length is less than the printhead to peel bar distance
(about 1/2 inch).
Media is moved to the end of form after image printing

before presenting media to the peel-off position. This
option is for labels that have wide gaps that result in
labels falling off the peel bar. This setting works with
End of Form
non-mark media where the end of form is not the
same as the next TOF. This setting is useful for die
cut labels where the physical bottom of the label can
be detected by the media sensor.
Image prints and media moves to peel-off position.

This option is for labels that have wide gap/marks that
result in labels falling off the peel bar. This selection is
intended for cases where presenting the next TOF or
End of Image
end of form still results in labels falling off the peel
bar. This menu selection works best if the length of
the image printed matches the physical length of the
label.
Factory Default Next TOF
This menu only visible when the peel option is

IMPORTANT installed.
End of Image selection is affected by the Media >

IMPORTANT Image > Clip Page option.
Page | 72
MEDIA > Handling > Cal in Peel Mode
This option allows you to perform a calibration in Peel-Off Media Handling
mode. Calibration in Peel-Off mode does not stop and wait for you to
remove peeled labels. Therefore, be prepared to remove the labels as they
are automatically peeled.
Calibration from the panel when in peel mode is not

Disable
permitted and a warning message will display.
Auto Calibrate can be performed from the front panel

Enable
in peel mode.
Factory Disable
This menu only visible when the peel option is

IMPORTANT installed.
If this menu is set to Disable, then Power-Up

IMPORTANT Action = “Auto-Cal” is ignored.
MEDIA > Handling > Label Wait Time

Media Handling is set to Tear-Off Strip or Continuous (Tear Strip Full):
Label Wait Time specifies the number of seconds after printing stops that
the printer will wait before it advances media to the tear bar position.
Media Handling is set to Peel-Off:
Label Wait Time specifies the number of seconds the printer will wait after a
label is removed from the peel/tear bar before starting to print the next label.
Minimum 0.1 seconds
Maximum 60.0 seconds
Factory Default 1.0 seconds
If the RFID option is installed and the Factory

IMPORTANT Configuration is the power-up default, this menu
will automatically be changed to 1.0 seconds.
Page | 73
Media > Ribbon
Media > Ribbon > Ribbon Low

When enabled and the amount of ribbon remaining on the supply spindle is
approximately 75 to 50 meters or less, a “Ribbon Low” warning will pop up
on the ONLINE screen.
Disable No Ribbon Low warning will appear.
The Ribbon Low warning will appear when the ribbon

Enable
on the supply spindle is 75 meters or less.
Factory Default Disable
Media > TOF
Media > TOF > TOF Detect Fault

Allows selection of three different TOF (Top-of-Form) detection faults. The
printer displays a Gap Not Detected fault and stops printing when media has
advanced a distance equal to X or more times Media > Image > Label Length.
1 Label The Gap Not Detected fault is declared after 1 label.
3 Labels The Gap Not Detected fault is declared after 3 labels.
9 Labels The Gap Not Detected fault is declared after 9 labels.
Factory Default 3 Labels
The correct Label Length value, equal to the

IMPORTANT physical length of the installed label, must be
entered in Media > Image > Label Length.
Page | 74
Media > TOF > Ticket Save Mode
This option determines the action of the media for Continuous (Standard),
Tear-Off Strip and Cut Media Handling Modes after the printer is first
powered up or after the printhead has been opened and then closed. When
enabled, this option eliminates wasting label(s) or ticket stock when the
printer advances media to search for the next TOF position.
Option applies only to 0.5 inch or longer label lengths.
The printer assumes that the media is not at the correct

TOF position after cycling power or after the printhead is
opened and then closed. Printing will begin only after the
Disable next TOF is detected.
When disabling, Sensors > Calibrate > Online Action
and Sensors > Calibrate > HeadClose Action will not
be adjusted.
The printer will assume that media is at the TOF position

after cycling power or after the printhead is opened and then
closed. Printing will begin without advancing media to
Enable search for the next TOF position.
When enabled, Sensors > Calibrate > Online Action
and Sensors > Calibrate > HeadClose Action will
automatically be set to Disable.
The printer will assume that media is not at the TOF position
after cycling power but is at the TOF position after the
printhead is opened and then closed. After powering up,
printing will begin only after the next TOF is detected. After
No Seek opening the head, printing will begin without advancing
media to search for the next TOF position.
When enabled, Sensors > Calibrate > Online Action
and Sensors > Calibrate > HeadClose Action will
automatically be set to Disable.
The user must ensure that media is at the correct

TOF position (cross perforation, liner gap, notch
or mark at the tear bar edge) before cycling power
IMPORTANT or before closing and locking the pivoting deck. In
addition, media must be calibrated and the correct
Media Handling Mode, Label Length and Gap/Mark
Sensor selected and in Power-Up Config.
Page | 75
Media > TOF > TOF Adjust Mode
This option enables use of the Media > TOF > TOF Adjust Dist.
Disable The TOF Adjust Dist menu value will not be used.
Enable The TOF Adjust Dist menu value will be used.
Media > TOF > TOF Adjust Dist

This option sets the distance from the Top Of Form (TOF) that is left blank
(unprinted) after a label has been removed in Tear-Off Strip mode. When
this mode is enabled the start position for printing can be adjusted in
increments of 0.01 inch.
This adjustment can be helpful if a die cut label sticks to the platen by
means of jagged edges created during a poor die cut label removal using
the tear bar. By controlling how much blank space there is from TOF, you
can control how much the media is called back after it is torn off.
Minimum 0.00 inches
Maximum 0.40 inches
IMPORTANT Tear-Off Strip mode only
Media > Fault
Media > Fault > Label Missing

Allows the Label Taken Sensor to first detect the presence of a label at the
peel bar.
The printer does not generate a fault condition if a

Disable
missing label is encountered.
The printer generates a fault condition if a missing label

Enable
is encountered.
Page | 76
Media > Fault > Error Recover
This option determines how the printer handles data that was printing when
an error occurred.
The printer will not reprint the label that was printing
Disable
when the error condition occurred.
The printer reprints the label that was printing when

Enable
the error condition occurred.
Media > Fault > Head Warning

This option determines if the printer will warn the user when the print head
approaches its limit in terms of inches printed.
Do not show a warning message based on the print

Disable
head inches printed.
When the print head reaches a certain limit, a warning

Enable
message will pop up.
Media > Auto Label Map
Media > Auto Label Map > Select

This option specifies the maximum print width to be used by the application.
The IGP/Auto Label Mapping® feature allows backward compatibility of
programs written for Printronix line-matrix printers. It allows the printer to
print two-up (or other multi-up) labels. Instead of printing multiple labels
across the printer, it prints the leftmost label and the rightmost label, so the
printout will be twice as long but half as wide.
Excess data in any program sent to the printer with

horizontally adjacent labels that exceed the physical
Disable
page width of the printer will be clipped or wrapped
depending upon how the emulation is designed.
The printer will automatically reposition the

horizontally adjacent labels to a vertically adjacent
Enable position, or a combination of horizontal and vertical
positions based on the values selected under the
Auto Label Width and Number Labels menu items.
Page | 77
Media > Auto Label Map > Auto Label Width
The width of a single label to be printed or the maximum width of the media
that will be used for the print file. The value is selectable from 0.1 inch
through the maximum print width of the printer.
Minimum 0.1 inch
Maximum Media > Image > Label Width value.
Factory Default Depends on the model width.
Media > Auto Label Map > Number Labels

The desired number of labels to be printed vertically adjacent on the form.
Minimum 2
Maximum 40 or as page memory available.
Factory Default 2
Auto Label Map Examples

All of the examples below assume that the logical form length is set to the label length.
Example 1: Simple Case

Problem: A file has been constructed with two horizontally adjacent 4.0” labels for a printer with a
physical width of 8.0”. The user now wants to use this file with a printer that has a 4.0” physical width.
Solution with Menu Settings:
• Set Media > Auto Label Map > Auto Label Width to “4.0” (the width of the label)
• Set Media > Auto Label Map > Number Labels to “2”
• Set Media > Auto Label Map > Select to “Enable”.
Printer Operation: The printer will print the first (leftmost) 4.0” label first on the first thermal label, followed
by the second 4.0” label. These labels will be stacked vertically as shown in the diagram.
Page | 78
Example 2: Uneven Number Case
Problem: A file has been constructed with three horizontally adjacent 2.0” labels. The user now desires to
use this file with a printer that has a 4.0” physical width.
Solution #1 with Menu Settings:
• Set Media > Auto Label Map > Auto Label Width to “2.0” (the width of each labels)
Printer Operation for Solution #1: The printer will print the first two labels at the same time. These first
two labels will be horizontally adjacent. Once these labels have been completed, the printer will print the
remaining 2.0” labels along with a blank 2.0” label. See figure below.
Solution #2 with Menu Settings:

• Set Media > Auto Label Map > Auto Label Width to “2.0” (the width of two labels)
Page | 79
Printer Operation for Solution #2: The printer will print the first 2.0” label by itself, the second 2.0” label
by itself, and finally, the last 2.0” label by itself. See figure below.
Example 3: Past Maximum File Width

Problem: A file has been constructed with three horizontally adjacent 4.0” labels. The user now desires to
use this file with a printer that has an 8.0” physical width. The user should have used a solution similar to
one of the solutions in the examples above, but the user erroneously enters an Media > Auto Label Map >
Auto Label Width of “12.0” and a Media > Auto Label Map > Number Labels of “3”.
Printer Operation: The maximum Number Labels = (20”/12”) = 1.67 rounded up to 2. The printer will
automatically reduce the Media > Auto Label Map > Number Labels to “2”.
Example 4: Blank Label Case

Problem: A file exists with two horizontally adjacent 4.0” labels. The user now wants to use this file with a
printer that has a 4.0” physical width. The user decides to set the Media > Auto Label Map > Number
Labels to “3” and the Media > Auto Label Map > Label Width to “4.0” despite the fact that these values are
not optimum.
Printer Operation: The maximum Number Labels = (20”/4”) = 5. The selected value of 3 is legal. After the
file is sent, the printer will begin by printing the first 4.0” width label. Once that label is complete, it will print
the second 4.0” width label. Finally, once both of those labels have been printed, the printer will print a
blank 4.0” label.
Page | 80
Sensors
Intro: Sensor Types
When making changes in this section, there are certain implications that need to be understood because
some menus are intimately related. For example, when the menu Sensors > Control > Gap/Mark Sensor
is changed, this has an effect on other menu defaults as shown in Table 2 below.
Table 2. Gap/Mark Sensor Effects on other Menu Defaults
Paper Out Minimum Gap/Mark Paper Out

Gap/Mark Sensor
Sensor Delta Thresh Thresh
Disable Transmissive N/A N/A 1023
Mark Transmissive 48 250 1023
Gap Transmissive 80 689 1023
IMPORTANT When sensors settings are changed, the user must calibrate .
Sensors > Control
Sensors > Control > Gap/Mark Sensor

The available options specify the sensor type needed for detecting the Top-
of- Form position on media with label length indicators (gaps, notches,
holes, or black marks).
Select when using media with no label length

indicators (no gaps, notches, holes, or black marks),
Disable
or when you want the printer to ignore all existing
label length indicators on the installed media.
Select when using media that has horizontal black

marks located on the underside of the label liner,
Mark notch, hole or tag stock. The Top-of-Form position is
the leading edge of the black mark (trailing edge of
the notch, gap or hole).
The Top-of-Form position is the leading edge of the

Gap
die cut label or black mark on top side of label
Factory Default Gap for non-RFID printers and Mark for RFID printers
When you select Disable, the length of each label

is based on the Media > Image > Label Length
IMPORTANT menu or the value sent within the application
format.
If the RFID option is installed and powers up with

IMPORTANT the Factory Configuration, Mark will be selected.
Page | 81
Sensors > Control > Auto Calibrate
This executable menu is used to improve the sensitivity and reliability of the
Media Sensors in detecting gaps, notches, holes, or black marks on the
installed media, as well as a paper out condition. The operation is
successful when the Sensed Distance displayed correctly matches that of
the installed media.
For Gap: The Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing
edge of one gap to the trailing edge of the next gap (one label + one gap).
For Mark: The Sensed Distance should match the length from the leading
edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark.
Prior to running Auto Calibrate you must enter the

length of the installed media via the Media >
Image > Label Length menus. Selecting the
correct Label Length forces Auto Calibrate to
increase media advancement for long labels (to
IMPORTANT detect actual gaps, notches, or marks) and
decrease advancement for short labels.
Auto Calibrate supports label lengths up to 35

inches.
Sensors > Control > Sensed Distance

This value represents the distance that was sensed between the TOF of
one label to the TOF of the next label upon successful calibration. It is a
read-only value.
Gapped media: the distance equals the physical label length plus one gap,
notch, or hole (trailing edge of one gap, notch, or hole to the trailing edge of
the next gap, notch, or hole).
Black mark media: the distance equals the leading edge of one black mark
to the leading edge of the next.
Setting Automatically calculated upon calibration.
Factory 0.0 inches
Page | 82
Sensors > Control > Gap/Mark Thresh
This menu item sets a value that, when exceeded by the output of the
media sensor, is recognized by the printer as a gap (or black mark). Upon
calibration, the value displayed is equal to the gap/mark threshold value set
by the procedure. If running the procedure does not provide a reliable Top-
Of-Form detection (e.g., when using unusual media), the Gap/Mark Thresh
value can be manually set to the desired value.
Minimum 0
Maximum 1023
Factory See Table 2
Sensors > Control > Paper Out Thresh

This menu item selects a value that, when exceeded by the output of the
media sensor, is recognized by the printer as a paper out condition. Upon
calibration, the value displayed is equal to the paper out threshold value set
by this procedure. If running the procedure does not provide a reliable paper
out detection, e.g., when using non-standard media, the Paper Out Thresh
value can be manually set to the desired value.
Minimum 0
Maximum 1023
Factory See Table 2
Sensors > Calibrate

You can run Auto Calibration from the Home screen, this section, or the Tools > Print Tests > Run Test
menu. Upon execution, the printer advances media the distance needed to accurately detect the label
length indicators, then stops at the Top-of-Form position, and momentarily displays the Sensed Distance
if successful. This process takes a few seconds to complete and results in changes to the values the
printer uses in the Sensors > Control subsection for Gap/Mark Threshold, Paper Out Threshold, and
Sensed Distance. These value changes take effect immediately within the current configuration menu.
Sensors > Calibrate > Auto Calibrate

See Sensors > Diagnostics > Media Profile
Page | 83
Sensors > Calibrate > Power-Up Action
Calibration activities when the printer is powered up.
Disable No activities at power up.
Auto Calibrate is performed at power-up. Once the

Auto Calibrate is complete, the printer will
Auto-Cal
momentarily display the Sensed Distance determined
by the Auto Calibrate.
Assumes user has already calibrated media and used

gap/mark sensor. This moves the media to Top-of-
Seek TOF
Form at power up if Sensors > Control > Gap/Mark
Sensor is not set to Disable.
Factory Auto-Cal
If Media > TOF >Ticket Save Mode is set, Auto-Cal

IMPORTANT and Seek TOF will not be performed.
SENSORS > Calibrate > HeadClose Action

Selects whether the printer performs a selected action after a print head
open fault condition is cleared.
No media motion after a print head open fault

Disable
condition is cleared.
Performs Auto Calibration every time the print head

Auto-Cal
open fault condition is cleared.
The Auto-Calibration will be done even if there is data

Auto-Cal Data
in buffer pending. Usually, it is ignored with data in
Pend
buffer.
Moves the media to TOF (Top Of Form) when the

printhead is closed unless Sensors > Control >
Seek TOF
Gap/Mark Sensor is set to Disable.. The media should
already be calibrated using Gap/Mark sensor.
Factory Disable
If Media > TOF > Ticket Save Mode is set, Auto-Cal

and Seek TOF will not be performed.
IMPORTANT If there is data pending (data in buffer) when the
head open fault is cleared, Auto-Cal and Seek TOF
are ignored.
Page | 84
Sensors > Calibrate > Online Action
Whenever the printer is brought ONLINE, it automatically performs an Auto
Calibrate if enabled. This option should only be set before any data is sent
to the printer.
No Auto Calibration is performed when going

Disable
ONLINE.
Once the Auto Calibrate is complete, the printer

Auto-Cal momentarily displays the Sensed Distance and then
resumes printing any pending jobs.
Factory Disable
If Ticket Save mode is enabled, you will not be

IMPORTANT able to enable this menu. A warning message will
be displayed instead.
Sensors > Calibrate > Gap Windowing

This feature compensates for any early falling edges or spurious peaks and
troughs that may appear within the gap length in media. These edges or
peaks and troughs can cause unreliable detection of the leading edge of the
next label (top-of-form). Use Gap Windowing to resolve the following
problems:
Loss of one or more complete (serialized) labels.
Start of an image printed in the middle of a gap, especially with fanfold,
perforated media.
Top part of an image lost when printing in head-first orientation.
When the leading edge of a gap is detected, the

printer continuously looks for the leading edge of the
Disable next label and uses it as the TOF position.
Perforations or unusual media discrepancies within
the gap can cause inaccurate TOF detection.
When the leading edge of a gap is detected, the

printer ignores the first 90% of the gap length value
specified in the Gap Length menu option. The result is
Enable that cross perforations or unusual media
discrepancies within the gap are filtered out, allowing
the printer to reliably detect the actual leading edge of
the next label and use it as the TOF position.
Factory Disable
Page | 85
Sensors > Calibrate > Gap Length
Gap Length is the actual length (height) of a label gap measured in .01 inch
increments.
Minimum 0.05 inches
Maximum 1.00 inches
Factory 0.12 inches
You must enter the correct Gap Length. If the Gap

WARNING Length is too long, the image will shift down from
the leading edge (TOF) of the label.
Sensors > Calibrate > Minimum Delta

This menu changes the minimum threshold value the sensor(s) require to
detect the difference between the label and a gap, notch, hole or black
mark. This allows bolder gaps (such as notches or holes) to be used as the
TOF while intermediate gaps (liner) can be ignored. Increasing the value
makes the sensor(s) less sensitive to intermediate gaps and noise.
Decreasing the value makes the sensor(s) more sensitive for detecting gaps
on low contrast media, where there is very little difference between the label
and the gap (liner).
Minimum 048
Maximum 200
Gap/Mark Sensor = Disable, Gap, or Mark: 048

Factory
Otherwise: 080
Page | 86
Sensors > Calibrate > Use Label Length
Determines whether or not Media > Image > Label Length is used during
Auto Calibrate. This resolves problems where the sensor(s) may mistake
high noise levels or preprinted images within the label as the gap, notch,
hole, or black mark that could result in a sensed distance value much
shorter than the actual label length. For example, a 0.2 inch calibrated
Sensed Distance with a 3.0 inch long label installed.
Auto Calibrate relies exclusively in its ability to detect

varying transitions between labels and gaps, notches,
holes, or black marks while advancing media during
Disable
the calibrate process to determine Sensed Distance.
The amount of media advanced is based on the
number of transitions detected.
The Label Length is used in the calibrate algorithm.

This causes the Auto Calibrate process to advance
Enable media the minimum distance required to detect the
true gap, notch, hole, or black mark used for TOF
(Top-of-Form) sensing.
Factory Enable
This menu will be ignored when Media > Image

IMPORTANT >Set Label Length is set to “Automatic”. This is
the Factory default.
Setting the Label Length value less than half the

actual length of the label in use will result in
WARNING erroneous Sensed Distance values when Auto
Calibrate is performed.
Page | 87
Sensors > Calibrate > Threshold Range
This option allows the user to select the optimal threshold range for the label
stock. The printer defaults to using a threshold range of 50% of the positive
going pulse (see Sensors > Diagnostics > Media Profile) that represents
each gap, notch or mark detected after doing an Auto or Manual Calibrate.
The printer then detects anything within the label with that threshold range
as TOF. While this range is ideal for most medias, some labels with a
preprinted image, liner gap or inlay can confuse the media sensor(s)
causing a false TOF detection. In most cases this can be resolved by
selecting a higher threshold range so the printer will only trigger on the true
TOF (gap, notch or mark) position.
Minimum 5%
Maximum 95%
Factory 50% (75% - RFID equipped printers)
A new threshold range will not take effect until

Calibration is successfully performed. A Sensors >
IMPORTANT Diagnostics > Media Profile should be run after a
Calibrate to visually verify that the new range is
the best possible selection.
Sensors > Calibrate > Mark TOF Detect

This menu controls how the TOF will be detected for Mark media.
Mark Lead The leading edge of the mark will be used as the TOF
Edge and printing will be begin here.
The trailing edge of the mark will be used as the TOF

Mark Trail Edge
and printing will be begin here.
Factory Mark Lead Edge
Page | 88
Sensors > Calibrate > Label Window
This menu controls whether or not media gap detection will be restricted to
a certain plus/minus region to the current calibrated label length. For
example, if the calibration resulted in a label length of 6 inches, then this
menu enabled would restrict future gap detection to 6 inches plus or minus
a range defined by the menu Lbl Win Len.
Gap or Mark detection will not be restricted and is

Disable
based on the when the sensor detects a gap or mark.
Gap or Mark detection will be restricted to a given

Enable
area defined by Lbl Win Len menu.
Factory Disable
Sensors > Calibrate > Lbl Win Len

When the menu Label Window is enabled, this menu defines the plus or
minus distance to seek gaps or marks. For example, if the calibrated label
length is 6 inches, then a setting of 10% suggests to restrict gap or mark
detection to plus or minus 0.6 inches near the expected 6 inch point of the
label.
Minimum 1 (percent)
Maximum 50 (percent)
Factory 5 (percent)
Sensors > Diagnostics
Sensors > Diagnostics > Media Profile

This executable menu provides a graphical printout showing the
relationship of the Paper Out Threshold and the Gap/Mark Threshold. The
profile printout assists you in setting the thresholds for difficult media. This
includes preprinted labels, and labels with poor gap/media dynamic
range.
When “Print Profile” is executed, the printer will

Start advance media and print the media profile along the
length of each label.
The printer will continue to print the profile until you

Completed
press the ↵ ENTER key.
Page | 89
Sensors > Diagnostics > Manual Calibrate
Manual Calibrate is another method of improving the printer’s media
sensing and is only used when Auto Calibrate has failed or the Gap/Mark
Threshold or Paper Out Threshold values derived from Auto Calibrate do
not improve the media sensors’ gap or mark sensing capability.
To initiate Manual Calibrate, press ↵ ENTER key

Start when “Manual Calibrate” displays. You will then be
prompted for the remaining steps.
Manual Calibrate is completed successfully when the

displayed Sensed Distance correctly matches that of
the installed media. When Gap is selected, the
Sensed Distance should match the length from the
Completed trailing edge of one gap to the trailing edge of the next
gap (or one label + one gap). When Mark is selected,
the Sensed Distance should match the length from
the leading edge of one black mark to the leading
edge of the next black mark.
This process takes longer than Auto Calibrate, and

the end result is a change to the Gap/Mark Threshold,
Paper Out Threshold, and Sensed Distance values
Effects
that the printer will use. These value changes take
effect immediately within the current configuration
menu.
Manual Calibrate supports label lengths up to 24

IMPORTANT inches.
Page | 90
System
System > Control
System > Control > Display Language

This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the control panel:
English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Simplified Chinese,
Traditional Chinese, Korean, and Russian.
Factory Default English
System > Control > LCD Brightness

The brightness of the control panel backlight.
Minimum 0
Maximum 31
Factory Default 16
This value is saved independent of any one

IMPORTANT configuration and will be preserved across
loading configurations.
System > Control > Power-up State

Determines if the printer will power-up in the ONLINE state or OFFLINE
state (Home screen).
Online ONLINE state
Offline OFFLINE state
Factory Default ONLINE
This OFFLINE selection must be saved as a

IMPORTANT power-up configuration to be used.
Page | 91
System > Control > Media Units
Determines if distances in the MEDIA section are displayed in inches or
millimeters.
In Inches Inches are used.
In Millimeters Millimeters are used.
Factory Default In Inches
System > Control > Batch Counter

Displays the number of pages remaining to be printed in a print job on the
ONLINE screen message area. This feature is supported in PGL and ZGL
only.
Disable Remaining pages is not displayed.
Enable The number of remaining pages is displayed.
PGL Syntax ~EXECUTE;formname;[;FC][;ICNTn][;FCNTn]
ZGL Syntax ^PQ(#Pages)
If the correct execute command is absent from the

WARNING print file, “0 Pages” will continually display on the
control panel.
System > Control > Feed Key Online

This option changes the functionality of the FEED key when the printer is
ONLINE.
When selected, pressing the FEED key causes the

Feed
printer to feed a form.
When selected, pressing the FEED key causes the

Reprint Last
printer to reprint the last printed form.
Factory Default Feed
Page | 92
System > Control > Cancel Operation
This option determines if the LEFT SOFT key in the Home screen will be
used for “Cancel Data”. If so, then the LEFT SOFT key will be active when
there is data in buffer.
No option will be available to the user to Cancel Data

Disable
from the front panel.
Allow the “Cancel Data” operation to be used. When

Enable
executed, all data in the printer will be cancelled.
System > Control > Auto Locking

This option can force the front panel ↵ ENTER key to return to the locked
status five minutes after the last key press.
The ↵ ENTER key is not automatically locked. It

Disable remains in its current state until locked manually or
via power-up.
The ↵ ENTER key is automatically locked five minutes

Enable
after the last key press.
System > Control > Set Lock Key

Normally, to lock or unlock the printer menu, the up/down keys are pressed
at the same time. The Set Lock Key executable menu lets you choose
different keys to lock or unlock the printer menu. You may choose almost
any group of keys as the new lock and unlock keys. You cannot use the
↵ ENTER key or any key combinations which are already used for other
functions. One or more keys can used simultaneously.
The ↵ ENTER key is used to start the sequence and

Start
the user will be asked to select a new lock key.
After following all the instructions on the front panel

(including entering the new lock key twice to confirm),
Completed
the user will be informed the process was completed.
If not successful, then the user will alerted.
The new lock combination will remain even if the

IMPORTANT printer is powered off and back on.
Page | 93
System > Energy Star
System > Energy Star > Pwr Saver Time

The time interval you specify for this parameter sets the amount of idle time
before the printer goes into Power Saver mode. When you enter into Power
Saver mode, the panel backlight is dimmed, the engine shuts down, and a
panel message informs the user.
Pressing any Control Panel key or certain network access to the printer
removes the Power Saver message from the panel and the turns on the
backlight (but the engine is still shut down). Sending a print job to the printer
results in a full exit of Power Saver mode.
The options are 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 45, 60, and 120
Selections
minutes.
Factory Default 5 minutes.
System > Energy Star > Pwr Saver Active

This menu allows you to enable and disable Power Saver mode. If enabled,
the menu for Power Saver Time is in effect.
Disable Power Saver mode is disabled and not used.
Enable Power Saver mode is enabled.
System > Flash File View

This subsection will show all font and user downloaded files in FLASH memory. Files with one of the
filename extensions Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus are not shown in this section. The name
of the file will be shown along with its size in bytes. This is a read-only section.
System > Flash File Edit

This subsection can be used to configure how FLASH file storage can be used and allow the users to
delete files, copy files to the SD card, optimize memory, etc.
Page | 94
System > Flash File Edit > Overwrite Files
This allows you to prevent files from being overwritten by disabling the
overwrite function.
Files cannot be overwritten either from copying a file

Disable
from an SD card or by the host application.
Enable Files can be overwritten as needed.
When files are overwritten, the FLASH used for

the original file is not truly deleted. Instead, that
IMPORTANT memory goes to the Flash Reclaimable area and
cannot be used again until an Optimize & Reboot
is performed.
System > Flash File Edit > Delete Files

This allows the user to delete user files in FLASH memory.
File 1 File 1 is listed and will be deleted if selected.
File N File N represents the last user file in FLASH.
When files are deleted, the file cannot be used,

IMPORTANT but the space cannot be used again until an
Optimize & Reboot is performed.
System > Flash File Edit > Available Space

Shows the user how much FLASH memory is available for new user files.
This does not count memory in the Flash Reclaimable area. This is a read-
only menu.
System > Flash File Edit > Flash Reclaimable

Shows the user how much FLASH memory is available to be reclaimed if
the user performs the Optimize & Reboot function. This is a read-only menu.
Page | 95
System > Flash File Edit > Optimize & Reboot
This is an executable menu that will reboot the printer and perform FLASH
optimization which will remove any existing fragmentation (shown in Flash
Reclaimable) back into the Available Space pool.
When executed, an “Optimizing Flash Files”

IMPORTANT message will be displayed when the printer is
rebooting.
System > Flash File Edit > Copy to SD

This menu is only available when an SD card is found in the printer. This
menu will transfer the selected file to the root directory of the installed SD
card.
File 1 File 1 will be copied to the SD card if selected.
…
File N File N will be copied to the SD card if selected.
The SD card must be installed at the time of
IMPORTANT power-up and cannot be removed until the printer
is powered off.
System > Flash File Edit > Copy to USB

This menu is only available when an USB drive is found in the printer. This
menu will transfer the selected file to the root directory of the installed USB
drive.
File 1 File 1 will be copied to the USB drive if selected.
…
File N File N will be copied to the USB drive if selected.
The USB drive must be installed at the time of this
IMPORTANT operation and cannot be removed until the copy is
complete.
System > Flash File Edit > Print File List

Prints a summary of the files stored in flash memory and several statistics
on file system usage.
System > SD File View

This subsection will only be available if the SD card is installed at the time of power-up and not removed
until the printer is powered off. It will show all files in the root directory of the SD card. The name of the file
will be shown along with its size in bytes. This is a read-only section.
System > SD File Edit

This subsection can be used to configure how SD file storage can be used and allow the users to delete
SD files, copy files from SD to FLASH, view available SD space, and manage the QCMC (Quick Change
Memory Card) option when included.
Page | 96
IMPORTANT The SD card must be installed at the time of power-up and cannot be removed
until the printer is powered off.
System > SD File Edit > Overwrite Files

Like System > Flash File Edit > Overwrite Files, this prevents SD files from
being overwritten by disabling the overwrite function.
Disable SD files cannot be overwritten.
SD files can be overwritten either from copying a file

Enable
from FLASH or by the host application.
System > SD File Edit > Write Protect

This prevents any writing to the SD card by the emulations as jobs are
processed. This might be used to protect an SD card purchased with a
Premium or Andale font, for example. If the SD has a physical switch to
prevent writing, this takes precedence.
Disable SD files can be written as usual.
Enable SD files will not be written.
System > SD File Edit > Delete Files

This allows the user to delete user files from SD card root directory.
File N File N is the last file on the SD card root directory.
System > SD File Edit > Print Files

This allows the user to choose a file to execute like a job sent from the host.
File 1 File 1 is listed and will be printed if selected.
File N File N is the last file and will be printed if selected.
Page | 97
System > SD File Edit > Available Space
Shows the user how much SD card memory is available for new user files.
This is a read-only menu.
System > SD File Edit > Copy from SD

This menu will transfer the selected file from the SD card root directory to
the printer FLASH memory.
File 1 File 1 will be copied from the SD card if selected.
File N File N will be copied from the SD card if selected.
System > SD File Edit > Print File List

Prints a summary of the files stored in the SD card root directory and
several statistics on SD file system usage.
System > SD File Edit > QCMC Update

This menu can be used to update the configuration within the QCMC image
stored on the SD card (see Appendix G Quick Change Memory Cartridge
(QCMC).
System > SD File Edit > QCMC Erase

This menu can be used to erase the QCMC image stored on the SD card
(see Appendix G Quick Change Memory Cartridge (QCMC).
System > USB File View

This subsection will only be available if a USB drive is installed. It will show all files in the root directory of
the USB drive. The name of the file will be shown along with its size in bytes. This is a read-only section.
When reading the USB drive and listing available files, the following are considered valid file names:
• Digits, uppercase, and lowercase characters
• Dot ‘.’
• Underscore ‘_’
• Dash ‘-‘
• Ampersand ‘&’
• Tilde ‘~’
File names that do not conform will not be shown.
Files that are greater than 2 GB are ignored as well to prevent overwhelming the system.
Page | 98
System > USB File Edit
This subsection can be used to configure how USB file storage can be used and allow the users to delete
USB drive files, copy files from USB to FLASH, and view available USB space. The idea is that the USB
can be used at run-time to copy files to and from the FLASH memory. Transfers between USB and SD
cards can be done on a computer and are not part of the functionality present within the printer.
IMPORTANT The USB drive can be inserted and removed during run-time. A message on the
front panel will be displayed acknowledging the USB was inserted or removed.
IMPORTANT Memory transfers are limited by the amount of free RAM in the system. We
recommend limiting the file transfer size to 20 MB.
System > USB File Edit > Overwrite Files

Like System > Flash File Edit > Overwrite Files, this prevents USB files from
being overwritten by disabling the overwrite function.
Disable USB files cannot be overwritten.
USB files can be overwritten either from copying a file

Enable
from FLASH or by the host application.
System > USB File Edit > Delete Files

This allows the user to delete user files from USB card root directory.
File N File N is the last file on the USB card root directory.
System > USB File Edit > Print Files

This allows the user to choose a file to execute like a job sent from the host.
File 1 File 1 is listed and will be printed if selected.
File N File N is the last file and will be printed if selected.
System > USB File Edit > Available Space

Shows the user how much USB drive memory is available for new user
files. This is a read-only menu.
Page | 99
System > USB File Edit > Copy from USB
This menu will transfer the selected file from the USB drive root directory to
the printer FLASH memory.
File 1 File 1 will be copied from the USB drive if selected.
File N File N will be copied from the USB drive if selected.
System > USB File Edit > Print File List

Prints a summary of the files stored in the USB drive root directory and
several statistics on USB file system usage.
System > Printer Mgmt
System > Printer Mgmt > Rcv. Status Port

This option defines the interface being used to receive the emulation status
command.
When selected, the status command is sent to the

Automatic printer with the print data through the active host
interface.
When selected, the status command is sent to the

Serial printer through the serial interface regardless of the
active host interface.
Page | 100
System > Printer Mgmt > Ret. Status Port
This option selects the port for return Status Commands used by the
emulations. For PGL, this is the ~STATUS command, and for ZGL, this is
the ^HS command.
Sends the data through the same port used to

Automatic
receive the application job.
Disable Status is not sent back to the host.
E-NET Data Port Ethernet data port.
Serial Serial RS-232 port
E-NET Stat Port Ethernet port as set in Status Port Number menu
USB USB
System > Printer Mgmt > Status Port Number

This menu selects the port number where the printer sends the emulation
status.
Minimum 1025
Maximum 65535
Factory Default 3002
System > Printer Mgmt > PNE Port Choice

This menu selects which port the printer expects PNE (PrintNet Enterprise)
to connect to, via Ethernet or USB. The factory default is Ethernet.
Disable PNE communication will be disabled.
Ethernet Use Ethernet to connect with PNE.
USB Use USB to connect with PNE.
Factory Default Ethernet
Page | 101
System > Printer Mgmt > PNE Port Number
This menu selects the port number that the printer expects PNE to connect
through.
Minimum 1025
Maximum 65535
System > Printer Mgmt > PNE Port Timeout

If PNE has not communicated to the printer within a timeout period, the PNE
session closes.
Minimum 1 second
Maximum 255 seconds
Factory Default 100 seconds
System > Printer Mgmt > Mgmt Port Number

This menu selects the port number that the printer expects the PXML or
UCP to connect through.
Minimum 1023
Maximum 65535
System > Printer Mgmt > Mgmt Protocol

Since PXML and UCP management protocols share the same Ethernet
port, only one can be active at a time. This menu selects the active
Management Protocol Interface, either PXML or UCP.
Printronix XML management protocol used to control

PXML and manage the printer. See the XML Programmer
Reference Guide for more information.
The Universal Control Port that can be used for GPIO

UCP
or CST applications.
Factory Default PXML
Page | 102
System > Date
This subsection can be used to configure the Date and Time in the printer. If the Real Time Clock (RTC)
is installed the values will be saved in the RTC otherwise the values will be reset when the printer is
powered off. The Printer Time and Date can also be set by setting the NTP servers in the PrintNet
Enterprise through the Printer Webpage. Since the NTP servers return the Date and Time as
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the Time Zone Offset must be set to display the local time. If the
NTP servers information is set, the UTC will override the RTC in the printer.
System > Date > Hour

This option allows you to set the hour.
Minimum 00
Maximum 23
Factory Default 0
System > Date > Minute

This option allows you to set the minutes.
Minimum 00
Maximum 59
Factory Default 0
System > Date > Year

This option allows you to set the year.
Minimum 2018
Maximum 2037
System > Date > Month

This option allows you to set the month.
Minimum January
Maximum December
Factory Default January
Page | 103
System > Date > Day
This option allows you to set the day.
Minimum 01
Maximum 31
Factory Default 01
System > Date > Time Zone Offset

This option allows you to add a time zone offset to the value to localize the
UTC time.
Minimum UTC-12:00
Maximum UTC+14:00
Factory Default UTC+00:00
Page | 104
Host IO
Host IO > Control
Host IO > Control > Interface

This option allows you to send print jobs through any interface with auto-
switching selected as host interface. It also allows a particular interface
from the menu to be selected.
Automatically switches interface when host data is

Auto Switching sent to that interface (and any job in progress is
completed).
Serial Serial RS-232
Ethernet Ethernet Interface
USB USB Interface
Bluetooth Bluetooth Interface (if installed)
Host USB Interface (if Host USB HID device is

Host USB
attached)
Factory Default Auto Switching
Host IO > USB Port
Host IO > USB Port > Buffer (Kbytes)

This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the USB buffer
incremented in 1 Kbyte increments.
Options 1-16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024
Factory Default 16 Kbytes
Page | 105
Host IO > USB Port > AutoSW Timeout
This is the timeout value used for the current port to then check the other
selected port types for data to print. When the printer has not received data
from the host after a certain period of time, it needs to time out in order to
service the other ports. This submenu is only available when Host IO >
Control > Interface is set to Auto Switching.
Minimum 10 second
Maximum 60 seconds
Host IO > USB Port > USB Protocol

While the USB protocol is a standard, some operating systems like the
Linux BOSS 5.1 have some unique behaviors that require the printer to
change its implementation.
Standard Standard USB Function
Boss 5.1 Support for the BOSS 5.1 Linux system.
Page | 106
Host IO > Serial Port
Host IO > Serial > Flow Control

Sets the flow control mode for host IO data transfer.
In the Software Only mode the data flow control does

not use any of the Hardware line (RTS/CTS).
The Serial Debug IO will be active when set to
Software Only.
Software Only
Side Effects: Menu Request to Send and selection
RTS/CTS from menu Data Protocol are hidden. If
RTS/CTS was the current setting, then it is changed
to XON/XOFF.
In the Software & Hardware mode, the data flow

control also uses the hardware lines (RTS/CTS).
Software & The Serial Debug IO will not be active when set to
Hardware Software & Hardware.
Side Effects: Menu Request to Send and selection
RTS/CTS from menu Data Protocol are unhidden.
Factory Default Software Only
Serial Debug is only needed by Field Engineers

IMPORTANT and is not required for normal operation.
Host IO > Serial Port > Buffer (Kbytes)

This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Serial
buffer incremented in 1 Kbyte increments.
Options 1-16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024
Page | 107
Host IO > Serial Port > Baud Rate
Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer. Baud rate is the
speed at which serial data is transferred between the host computer and
the printer.
600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,

Selections
and 115200 baud.
Factory Default 9600 baud
If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200

and you experience data loss, you may need to
IMPORTANT lower the baud rate. You also may need to
increase the Buffer (Kbytes) parameter to improve
performance.
Host IO > Serial Port > Word Length

Sets the length of the serial data word. The length of the data word can be
set to 7 or 8 bits and must match the corresponding data bits setting in the
host computer.
7 7 bit data word
8 8 bit data word
Factory Default 8
Host IO > Serial Port > Stop Bits

Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word. Either 1 or 2 stop bits
can be selected. The setting must match the corresponding stop bit setting
in the host computer.
1 1 stop bit
2 2 stop bits
Factory Default 1
Host IO > Serial Port > Parity

The options are Odd, Even, Mark, Sense, or None. The setting must match
the corresponding parity setting in the host computer.
Factory Default None
Page | 108
Host IO > Serial Port > Data Protocol
You can select one of the following serial interface protocols to meet the
host interface requirements,
The printer controls the flow of communication from

the host by turning the transmission on and off. In
some situations, such as when the buffer is full or the
timing of signals is too slow or too fast, the printer will
tell the host to stop transmission by sending an XOFF
character. An XOFF character is sent when the
number of empty bytes in the buffer is less than or
XON / XOFF
equal to 25 percent of the buffer size. If the host
keeps sending data after an XOFF is sent, the printer
firmware will continue to send an XOFF for every 16
characters received. When cleared, the printer will
resume receiving data (XON). The data does not
have any End of Text codes; XON / XOFF is a non-
block protocol
End of Text / Acknowledge. The host controls the flow

of communication to the printer by sending a block of
data and ending the block with an End of Text (ETX)
ETX / ACK
signal. When the printer receives the ETX signal, it
will acknowledge the ETX, thereby acknowledging it
has received the entire block of data.
ACK means acknowledge; the device acknowledges it

has accepted a transmission. NAK means negative
ACK / NAK
acknowledge; the device did not receive the
transmission
Page | 109
The printer controls the flow of communication from
the host by turning the transmission on and off using
response characters sent to the host. If the number of
valid bytes in the buffer reaches 75 percent of the
buffer size, the ONLINE or OFFLINE and buffer full
response character is sent. If the buffer is completely
full, an ONLINE or OFFLINE buffer full response is
sent every time a character is sent from the host.
Whenever the printer state changes to ONLINE or
OFFLINE, the appropriate response character is sent.
If the idle response option is enabled, the printer will
send a response character every two seconds while
the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75
percent of the buffer size. If a poll character is
received (configurable from the Poll Character xx Hex
Series1 1 Char option on the front panel from hex 0 through FF), the
printer will send a response character n milliseconds
later (configurable from the Poll Character xx MS on
the front panel from 0 through 30). This n milliseconds
is called the poll delay. The poll character will be
removed from the input data stream and will not be
processed. This may cause problems with the
transmission of binary data (e.g., control codes, bit
image, etc.). If a poll delay is started due to the
receipt of a poll character and another poll character
is received, the second poll character has no effect
and is removed from the input data stream. If a
transition (from buffer full to empty or ONLINE to
OFFLINE) occurs during a poll delay, the new printer
state will be sent at the end of the poll delay. See
Table 3.
This protocol behaves exactly the same as the Series
1 Char except there is a two-character response to the
Series1 2 Char
host. The response characters are described in Table
3.
The host controls the flow of communication to the
printer by sending a block of data and ending the
block with an Enquiry (ENQ) character. When the
ENQ / ACK printer receives the ENQ Character, it acknowledges
the ENQ, thereby acknowledging it has received the
entire block of data. Status will also be sent before the
ACK. The status is as shown in Table 4.
The printer controls the data flow by sending this

hardware signal to the host. If there is enough room in
the printer buffer, the printer will send a high signal; if
RTS / CTS the buffer is full, the printer will send a low signal.
RTS tells the host if it is safe to send more data. (If
the host sends data during an unsafe condition, data
will be lost.)
Factory Default XON / XOFF
Page | 110
If the menu Flow Control is set to Software Only
IMPORTANT when this setting is RTS/CTS, then this menu will
be changed to XON/XOF.
Table 3. Response for Series1 Char
Series1 1 Char Series1 2 Char

Printer State
Response Response
ONLINE and Buffer Empty CR 1 CR
ONLINE and Buffer Full 3 3 CR
OFFLINE and Buffer Empty 0 0 CR
OFFLINE and Buffer Full 2 2 CR
Table 4. Response for ENQ / ACK
Printer State Status
ONLINE 40 06
ONLINE or Paper Motion Fault 43
Platen Open or Paper Out 47
Host IO > Serial Port > Request to Send

This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the
Request to Send (RTS) signal is generated. This signal indicates whether
or not the printer is ready to receive data.
True Continuously asserts the RTS signal.
On-Line and Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is ONLINE
BNF and the internal serial buffer is not full (BNF).
Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is OFFLINE

Off-Line or BF
or the internal serial buffer is full
On-line Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is ONLINE
False Never asserts the RTS signal.
Factory Default On-Line and BNF
If the menu Flow Control is set to Software Only

IMPORTANT when this menu will be hidden.
Page | 111
Host IO > Serial Port > Poll Character
This option is for the Series1 protocol. Whenever the printer receives this
character, it sends a response to the host indicating the current state of the
printer.
Minimum 00 hex
Maximum FF hex
Factory Default 00 hex
Host IO > Serial Port > Poll Response

This option is for the Series1 protocol. After receiving a poll character, the
printer will wait the poll response time in milliseconds before sending the
response.
Minimum 0 ms
Maximum 30 ms
Factory Default 0 ms
Host IO > Serial Port > Idle Response

This option is for the Series1 protocol and is relevant when the buffer is
less than 75% full.
The printer does not send a response character when

Disable
the buffer is less than 75% full..
The printer sends a response character every two

Enable
seconds while the buffer is less than 75% full.
Page | 112
Host IO > Serial Port > One Char Enquiry
The One Char Enquiry mode uses the Poll Character to detect a request
from the host and sends a response back to the host. This option also
allows you to turn this feature on and off.
Printer State Response (hex)
ONLINE and Buffer Not Full 22
ONLINE and Buffer Full 23
OFFLINE and Buffer Not Full 20
OFFLINE and Buffer Full 21
The Poll Character is removed from the data stream. If the Data Protocol is
set to ETX/ACK, ACK/NAK, or Series1, One Char Enquiry is automatically
disabled.
Disable The feature is disabled
Enable The feature is enabled
Host IO > Serial Port > Printer Status

With this feature, the printer will respond to an ENQ character by sending a
status byte to the host. The type of status byte is determined by this menu.
The selections allowed are ENQ/STX and ENQ.
Disable Printer status is not returned to the host.
ENQ / STX See Table 5
ENQ See Table 6
IMPORTANT The ENQ is removed from the data stream.
Page | 113
Table 5. ENQ/STX Status Byte
Bit Printer Status

0 Set when the printer is OFFLINE or the buffer is full.
1 Set when the printer is OFFLINE.
2 Clear during a paper out fault.
3 Always set.
4 Set during a Head Open fault.
5 Set during a buffer overflow fault.
6 Set during a parity or framing error fault.
7 Always clear.
Table 6. ENQ Status Byte
Bit Printer Status

0 Set when the label has printed.
1 Set when the label is presented.
2 Set while the printer is ONLINE.
3 Always set.
4 Set printing in the batch mode.
5 Set during a Ribbon fault.
6 Set during a Paper Out fault.
7 Set during a Head Open fault.
Host IO > Serial Port > Framing Errors

These are possible errors that can occur when serial interface settings of
the printer do not match those of the host computer. This menu determines
whether this error is shown on the control panel.
Disable Feature disabled.
If a framing error occurs, a fault message will display

Enable
on the control panel.
Page | 114
Host IO > Serial Port > Offline Process
Specifies how data is handled when the printer is OFFLINE.
When set to disable, the printer does not process data

Disable
from the Serial port while OFFLINE.
When set to enable, the printer continues to process

Enable (but not print) the current job from the Serial port while
the printer is OFFLINE until the printer's buffer is full.
Host IO > Serial Port > Report Status

When a fault condition occurs in the printer, normally only the active port
reports the fault to the host. With this menu item enabled, this port will
report any fault even when it is not the current, active port. This submenu is
only available when Host IO > Control > Interface is set to Auto Switching.
Disable Will not report the fault unless the active host.
Enable Will report the fault even if not the active host.
Host IO > Serial Port > Trickle Time

When the printer is printing data from a host and a second print job is
received by the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the
second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In
order to support this feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the
host and store it for future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then
receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel
port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error
from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next
byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the
host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its
buffer too fast.
This submenu is only available when Host IO > Control > Interface is set to
Auto Switching..
Options ¼, ½, 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16 seconds
Off Disable trickling of data.
Factory Default ¼ second
Page | 115
Host IO > Serial Port > AutoSW Timeout
Minimum 10 second
Maximum 60 seconds
Host IO > Bluetooth
Host IO > Bluetooth > Buffer (Kbytes)

This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Blurtooth
buffer incremented in 1 Kbyte increments.
Options 1-16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024
Host IO > Bluetooth > AutoSW Timeout

Minimum 10 second
Maximum 60 seconds
Host IO > Bluetooth > Connect Name

A 1-15 character, case-sensitive string that identifies the Printer Bluetooth.
These characters can be alphanumeric, symbols, or spaces.
Factory Default BT-PTX
Page | 116
Host IO > Bluetooth > PIN Code
This is the Bluetooth PIN Code
Host IO > Bluetooth > Pair Method

The Method used to Pair the printer Bluetooth to the host.
PASSKEY Use the Pass key to connect.
SSP_JUSTWORK No security, just connects to the host.
SSP_NUMERIC_ Require a entering a value sent from host to complete

COMPARE connection.
Factory Default PASSKEY
Host IO > Bluetooth > Mode

Operation Mode of the Bluetooth Interface.
Dual Dual Mode
BT2.1 Bluetooth 2.1
BT3.0 Bluetooth 3.0
BT4.0 Bluetooth 4.0
Factory Default BT3.0
Bluetooth > MAC Address

This item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is unique for each
Bluetooth. It is read-only.
IMPORTANT It is read-only.
Page | 117
Host IO > Host USB
Host IO > Host USB > AutoSW Timeout

Minimum 10 second
Maximum 60 seconds
Host IO > Host USB > Data

This selects how the input data is used.
The data is used to control the panel. This should

Panel
only be selected if the HID device is a Keyboard.
Data The data is sent to the emulation.
The data is displayed in the debug terminal. This is

Debug
useful for debugging the data sent by the HID device.
Factory Default Data
Page | 118
Network
For detailed information about using the NIC, refer to the Network Interface Card User’s Manual.
IMPORTANT Network menus are saved in the separate section of memory. Loading factory
configuration will NOT reset these items.
Network > Control
Network > Control > ASCII Data Port

This option allows you to set the port number for ASCII print jobs. The data
port number needs to match your host system setting.
Minimum 1025
Maximum 65535
Network > Control > Keep Alive Timer

This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run. Keep in mind that with
the Keep Alive Timer on, the TCP connection will stay connected even
after the print job has terminated if the host system does not close the
connection.
Minimum 0 minutes
Maximum 10 minutes
Factory Default 3 minutes
Page | 119
Network > Control > Job Control
Determines how the end-of-job packet is handled (when the
acknowledgement is sent back to the host system).
The NIC waits for the entire job to be received before

Standard
it indicates the job is done.
The NIC waits for the entire job to be printed before it

Enhanced
indicates the job is done.
The EOJ (End of Job) packet is acknowledged

immediately. Use this option if the job is timed out due
Fast Standard
to a delay in the acknowledgement of the EOJ packet
because of the amount of data being printed.
There is no synchronization between the NIC and the

Off
printer when printing a job.
Network > Control > Offline Process

Determines whether the network will process data while OFFLINE.
When set to disable, the printer does not process

Disable
network data while OFFLINE.
When set to enable, the printer continues to process

Enable (but not print) the current network job while the printer
is OFFLINE until the printer's buffer is full.
Network > Control > AutoSW Timeout

This is the timeout value used for the network to check the other port types
for data to print. When the printer has not received data from the host after
a certain period of time, it needs to time out in order to service the other
ports.
Minimum 10 second
Maximum 60 seconds
Page | 120
Network > Control > AutoSW Out
This menu determines when the autoswitching process will start.
Allows autoswitching when no data has been received

Data Timeout
for the selected Time Out period.
Allows autoswitching only when the Network Socket is

Session Close
closed.
Factory Default Data Timeout
Network > Control > E-Net to Default

This executable menu will reset the printer and reset all the Network
parameters to Factory defaults.
Network > Ethernet
WARNING Most of these menu items will not change until configuration of the printer is
deemed complete by the user and the printer is placed ONLINE. Upon going
online, the printer will automatically reboot and set these options.
Network > Ethernet > IP Address

This item allows you to set the IP Address for the TCP/IP protocol using a
virtual keyboard. Make sure you enter the complete IP address, including
the period symbol between the segments.
Structure Seg1.Seg2.Seg3.Seg4
Factory Default 000.000.000.000
IMPORTANT Disable BootP, ARP or DHCP before trying to

change the IP address.
IMPORTANT If changed, the printer reboots when it is placed

ONLINE.
Page | 121
Network > Ethernet > Subnet Mask
This item allows you to set the Subnet Mask for the TCP/IP protocol using
a virtual keyboard. Make sure you enter the complete mask, including the
period symbol between the segments.

change the subnet mask.
IMPORTANT If the printer has not rebooted after disabling

BootP, ARP or DHCP then the value shown is not
the static value. You MUST save this value or it
will be lost when the printer is rebooted.

ONLINE.
Network > Ethernet > Gateway Address

This item allows you to set the Gateway Address for the TCP/IP protocol
using a virtual keyboard. Make sure you enter the complete Gateway
address, including the period symbol between the segments.

change the gateway address.


ONLINE.
Network > Ethernet > MAC Address

NIC. It is read-only.
Page | 122
Network > Ethernet > DHCP
You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but consult
your administrator for the appropriate setting.
DHCP is disabled and you set your own static IP

Disable
address, subnet mask, and gateway address.
DHCP is enabled and IP address, subnet mask, and

Enable
gateway address is assigned dynamically.

ONLINE.
Network > Ethernet > BootP

You can enable/disable the BootP protocol using this option, but consult
Disable BootP is disabled.
Enable BootP is enabled.

ONLINE.
Page | 123
Network > Ethernet > Ethernet Speed
This menu appears only if a 10/100Base-T Network Interface Card (NIC) is
installed. The Ethernet Speed menu has five different speed modes to
allow compatibility with different systems and networks.
Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to perform an auto

detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half
Auto Select
Duplex, 10 Full Duplex, 100 Half Duplex, or 100 Full
Duplex.
Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10

10 Half Duplex
Megabits per second using half duplex.

10 Full Duplex
Megabits per second using full duplex.

100 Half Duplex
Megabits per second using half duplex.

100 Full Duplex
Megabits per second using full duplex.
Factory Default Auto Select
Network > WLAN
Network > WLAN> IP Address

This item allows you to set the IP Address for the TCP/IP protocol using a
virtual keyboard. Make sure you enter the complete IP address, including
the period symbol between the segments.

change the IP address.

ONLINE.
Page | 124
Network > WLAN > Subnet Mask
This item allows you to set the Subnet Mask for the TCP/IP protocol using
a virtual keyboard. Make sure you enter the complete mask, including the
period symbol between the segments.

change the subnet mask.


ONLINE.
Network > WLAN > Gateway Address

This item allows you to set the Gateway Address for the TCP/IP protocol
using a virtual keyboard. Make sure you enter the complete Gateway
address, including the period symbol between the segments.

change the gateway address.


ONLINE.
Network > WLAN > MAC Address

NIC. It is read-only.
Page | 125
Network > WLAN> DHCP
You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but consult
DHCP is disabled and you set your own static IP

Disable
address, subnet mask, and gateway address.
DHCP is enabled and IP address, subnet mask, and

Enable
gateway address is assigned dynamically.

ONLINE.
Network > WLAN> BootP

You can enable/disable the BootP protocol using this option, but consult
Disable BootP is disabled.
Enable BootP is enabled.

ONLINE.
Network > WLAN Params
Network > WLAN Params > SSID Name

A 1-32 character, case-sensitive string that identifies the Extended Service
Set Identification (ESS_ID) network the unit is part of (ESS_ID is also
called NET_ID). These characters can be alphanumeric, symbols, or
spaces.

ONLINE.
Network > WLAN Params > Reset SSID Name

Allows you to reset the SSID name

ONLINE.
Page | 126
Network > WLAN Params > Min Xfer Rate
Allows you to set the minimum speed at which the Wireless Option will
accept a connection (in millions of bits per second). The options are Auto-
negotiate, 1Mb/sec, 2Mb/sec, 5.5Mb/sec, 11Mb/sec, 6Mb/sec, 9Mb/sec,
12Mb/sec, 18Mb/sec, 24Mb/sec, 36Mb/sec, 48Mb/sec, and 54Mb/sec.
Minimum 1Mb/sec
Maximum 54Mb/sec
Factory Default Auto Negotiate

ONLINE.
Network > WLAN Params > Power Mgmt

This allows you to set the power save mode and sleep time in milliseconds
(ms). If set to zero, power-save mode will be disabled.
Minimum 0 ms
Maximum 1000 ms
Factory Default 0 ms

ONLINE.
Network > WLAN Params > Internat. Mode

When enabled, the Wireless option adapts to international frequency
requirements in Europe.
Disable International Mode is disabled.
Enable International Mode is enabled

ONLINE.
Page | 127
Network > WLAN Params > WEP Key 1 Format
Allows you to format WEP Key 1 in ASCII or hexadecimal code.
ASCII Allows you to format WEP Key 1 in ASCII format.
Allows you to format WEP Key 1 in hexadecimal

Hexadecimal
format.
Factory Default Hexadecimal
Network > WLAN Params > WEP Key 1 Width

This is the encryption strength. The options are 40 bits and 128 bits: 40 bits
are weaker and 128 bits are stronger.
40 bits Allows you to use 40 bit encryption for WEP Key 1.
Factory Default 128 bits
Network > WLAN Params > WEP Key 1

The individual characters for WEP Key 1.

ONLINE.


Hexadecimal
format.

Page | 128

ONLINE.


Hexadecimal
format.



ONLINE.


Hexadecimal
format.
Page | 129


ONLINE.
Network > WLAN Params > Default WEP Key

Allows you to set the default WEP key (1-4) or None (0).
Factory Default 0

ONLINE.
Network > WLAN Params > Reset WEP Keys

Allows you to reset all four WEP keys (WEP Key 1 through WEP Key 4) at
one time.

ONLINE.
Page | 130
Network > WLAN Params > WPA Mode
Selects the WPA wireless security mode.
Disable WPA security is disabled.
Selects personal or pre-shared key (PSK) mode for

Personal
WPA security.
802.1x is more secure than WPA2 mode. Enterprise

mode uses dynamic encryption keys distributed
securely after a user logs in with their username and
Enterprise
password, or provides a valid digital certificate. An
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) is used for
authentication.

ONLINE.
Network > WLAN Params > WPA Cipher

Selects the WPA wireless security cipher setting.
Disable WPA cipher is disabled.
TKIP Activates Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP).
AES Activates Advanced Encryption Standard (AES).
Activates both TKIP and AES ciphers. This mode is

TKIP+AES
sometimes called PSK2-mixed mode.
Factory Default TKIP if WPA mode is not disabled

ONLINE.
Network > WLAN Params > WPA Pass-Phrase

Allows you to set the WPA passphrase.

ONLINE.
Page | 131
Network > WLAN Params > Reset WPA P-Phs
Allows you to reset all 32 bytes of the WPA passphrase at once.

ONLINE.
Page | 132
Network > WLAN EAP
Network > WLAN EAP > EAP Mode

Selects the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to be used.
None EAP not used.
Uses Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol

LEAP
(LEAP).
Uses Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol

PEAP
(PEAP).
TTLS Uses Tunneled Transport Layer Security.
TLS Uses Transport Layer Security.

ONLINE.
Network > WLAN EAP > EAP User

The EAP Username.

ONLINE.
Network > WLAN EAP > Reset EAP User

Allows you to reset the EAP Username.

ONLINE.
Network > WLAN Params > EAP Password

The EAP Password.

ONLINE.
Page | 133
Network > WLAN Params > Reset EAP Pswd
Allows you to reset the EAP Password.

ONLINE.
Page | 134
Application
LP+, PGL, VGL Character Sets

The Character Sets for LP+, PGL, and VGL are chosen by Character Group and also a Character Set
within that group. The active Character Group will determine which collection of Character Sets will be
shown on the panel and available for selection. The LP+, PGL, and VGL each have their own Character
Group and Character Set selections. In the case of the LP+, every protocol (P-Series, Serial Matrix, etc.)
except for P-Series XQ will have its own selections as well.
The Character Group options and Character Set choices are described in this section. The default
Character Group “Standard Sets” is the legacy character set group and is unique to each emulation or
protocol. Therefore, it will be shown only in its respective section. The other groups are common and will
be described here. Any minor variations among the emulations will be highlighted here.
Character Group is selected within each emulation or protocol by their respective menu Application >
XXX Setup > Character Group, where XXX represents the emulation or protocol.
Application > XXX Setup > Character Group

This option selects the Character Set Group. Based on the group selected,
then the character set can be chosen with the menu following XXX Sets.
Standard Sets A set of legacy sets via Standard Sets menu.
Arabic Sets A set of Arabic sets via Arabic Sets menu.
Cyrillic Sets A set of Cyrillic sets via Cyrillic Sets menu.
European Sets A set of European sets via European Sets menu.
Greek Sets A set of Greek sets via Greek Sets menu.
Hebrew Sets A set of Hebrew sets via Hebrew Sets menu.
Turkish Sets A set of Turkish sets via Turkish Sets menu.
UTF-8 Selects the UTF-8 character set.
Factory Default Standard Sets
IMPORTANT VGL does not have the UTF-8 character group.
Application > XXX Setup > Standard Sets

This is the legacy Character Group and is described in each XXX Setup
section.
Standard Sets Unique Unique
Factory Default Unique
Page | 135
Application > XXX Setup > Arabic Sets
This option will show when menu Character Group is set to Arabic Sets.
ASMO 449
IBM CP864
ASMO 449+
IBM CP1046
ASMO 708
Arabic Lam One
ASMO 708+
Arabic Lam Two
Arabic Sets MSDOS CP710
Win. CP1256
MSDOS CP720
Farsi 1
Sakr CP714
Farsi 2
Aptec CP715
1098 Farsi 1285
CP 786
Factory Default ASMO 449
Application > XXX Setup > Cyrillic Sets

This option will show when menu Character Group is set to Cyrillic Sets.
Code Page 866 Cyrillic 7 bit

Cyrillic CP 437 Ukrainian
Cyrillic 113 Bulgarian
Cyrillic Sets
Cyrillic 8859-5 Win. CP 1251
ISO 915 Latvian 866
Code Page 855 CP 1048
Factory Default Code Page 866
CP 1048 is not available for VGL, P-Series, Serial

IMPORTANT Matrix, or Proprinter XL.
Page | 136
Application > XXX Setup > European Sets
This option will show when menu Character Group is set to European Sets.
Latin 2 8859-2
Polish POL1
Code Page 852
Win. CP 1250
Mazovia
Win. CP 1252
Kamenicky
Win. CP 1257
Roman 8
CP 858 EURO
PC-437 Slavic
European Sets Lith. CP 773
Slavic 1250
Serbo Croatic 1
Code Page 865
Serbo Croatic 2
Code Page 860
CP 774
Latin 1 8859-1
CP 775
Latin 5 8859-9
ISO 8859-4
Latin 9 8859-15
Factory Default Latin 2 8859-2
Application > XXX Setup > Greek Sets

This option will show when menu Character Group is set to Cyrillic Sets.
DEC 256 Greek Greek 851

ELOT 928 Greek Greek 437
Greek 3 Greek 8859-7
Greek Sets
ABY Greek Win. CP 1253
ABG Greek Greek 813 EURO
ELOT 927 Greek Greek 869 EURO
Factory Default DEC 256 Greek
Application > XXX Setup > Hebrew Sets

This option will show when menu Character Group is set to Hebrew Sets.
Hebrew Old
Latin-1 Hebrew
Hebrew Sets Hebrew New
Win. CP 1255
Hebrew DEC
Factory Default Hebrew Old
Page | 137
Application > XXX Setup > Turkish Sets
This option will show when menu Character Group is set to Turkish Sets.
Data Gen. Turk.*

NCR Turkish
DEC Turkish
PST Turkish
IBM Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Siemens Turkish
Code Page 853
Turkish Sets PTT Turkish
INFO Turkish
IBC Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Bull Turkish Code Page 857
AS400 Turkish Azeri
Unisys Turkish
Factory Default Data Gen. Turk.*
Azeri is not available for P-Series, Serial Matrix, or

IMPORTANT Epson-FX.
Application > XXX Setup > UTF-8

This option will show when menu Character Group is set to UTF-8.
UTF-8 Sets UTF-8
Factory Default UTF-8
IMPORTANT VGL does not support UTF-8.
Page | 138
Application > Control
Application > Control > Active IGP Emul

This function allows you to activate any IGP emulation listed in the menu.
The IGP emulation can be changed with this menu or by host command if
the current Active IGP emulation supports it.
PGL Printronix Graphics Language.
VGL Emulates the QMS Code-V protocol.
ZGL Emulates the Zebra ZPL protocol.
TGL Emulates the Toshiba TEC protocol.
IGL Emulates the Intermec IPL protocol.
STGL Emulates the Sato SPL protocol.
DGL Emulates the Datamax DPL protocol.
IEGL Emulates the IER IER-520 protocol.
MGL Emulates the Monarch MPCL II protocol.
EGL Emulates the Eltron Thermal Series protocol.
CGL Available upon special request only.
Factory Default PGL
NOTE: The menus for Emulations are described in detail in their respective Programmer’s Reference
Manual available from our company’s website.
Page | 139
Application > Control > PGL Diagnostics
This menu sets the error reporting capability of PGL when selected as the
current Active IGP emulation.
Full error checking reported. Any element that falls off

On
the current page is reported as an error.
Puts the printer in debug mode whenever a form is

defined in CREATE mode. Each line of the CREATE
Debug Mode
form will be printed along with an error if one has
occurred.
Allows you to halt the printer if a PGL error occurs. If

you select this option, the PGL error prints on the
paper, the message “PGL Error” displays on the front
Fault
panel and the printer goes OFFLINE. You must clear
the error before the printer can resume normal
operation.
Full error checking reported. Error messages are sent

Host back to the host through the port based on the menu
“Ret. Status Port” instead of being printed on paper.
There is no error checking. Graphic elements such as

Off alpha, line, barcodes, etc., will be clipped if they are
beyond the page boundaries.
Factory Default On
This is only shown when PGL is the Active IGP

IMPORTANT Emulation.
Page | 140
Application > Control > VGL Diagnostics
This menu sets the error reporting capability of VGL when selected as the
current Active IGP emulation.
Enable All Full error checking and report.
Disable No error checking and report.
Command syntax is checked and error messages

Error Msgs
printed when command parameters are incorrect.
Prints the following error markers for those elements

that print beyond the page boundaries:
>> For elements that begin off the right side of the
page.
Error Markers << For elements that begin at the indicated position
but end off the page.
For elements where the starting position of the
command contains an error other than an off-page
error.
Reports errors for elements that start or end beyond

Offpage Errors
the right edge of the page.
An error message will print when invalid barcode data

Barcode Errors
is encountered.
This is only shown when VGL is the Active IGP

IMPORTANT Emulation.
Application > Control > XXX Diagnostics

This menu sets the error reporting capability of the Active IGP Emulation
(except PGL and VGL). “XXX” is used to denote the Active IGP Emulation
ZGL, TGL, IGL, STGL, DGL, MGL, EGL or IEGL.
Disable Disable error checking..
Print Print the errors on the label.
Debug Port Send the information out the debug serial port.
For PGL, see PGL Diagnostics and for VGL, see

IMPORTANT VGL Diagnostics instead.
Page | 141
Application > Control > Active LP+ Emul
This function allows you to select the Active LinePrinter+ protocol. The LP+
is used to print text or jobs that are not associated with any IGP emulation.
Refer to the LinePrinter Plus Programmer's Reference Manual for more
information.
P-Series Printronix P-Series language.
P-Series XQ Printronix P-Series XQ language.
Serial Matrix Emulates the Serial Matrix protocol.
Proprinter XL Emulates the Proprinter XL protocol.
Epson FX Emulates the Epson FX-1050 protocol.
Factory Default P-Series
Application > Control > PTX Setup SFCC

Allows you to choose the hex value of the ASCII character you wish to use
as the SFCC for the PTX SETUP command.
Minimum hex 01
Maximum hex FF
Factory Default hex 21 or the “!” character
Application > Control > PTX Setup Parse

Determines how PTX_SETUP commands as described in the section The
PTX_SETUP Commands are handled within the data stream.
Enable Will parse and execute the PTX_SETUP commands
Ignore Will parse PTX_SETUP commands but ignore them
Will not parse the PTX_SETUP commands so they

Disable
will be treated as normal text.
Page | 142
Application > Control > PAA: Select Tool
You can enable a CST (Character Substitution Table) with this menu. The
CST is loaded in the printer FLASH memory and will be executed by the
PAA (Printronix Application Adapter). Refer to the PrintNet Enterprise Suite
User’s Manual to learn more about how to create and use CSTs.
None No CST will be active.
CST-1 CST-1 is active.
CST-2 CST-2 is active.
This menu only appears if a CST is loaded. A CST

file *.bnd will show in the System > Flash File
IMPORTANT View submenu and is also visible in the
Configuration Printout header.
Application > Control > Compatibility

This parameter allows you to make T800 series thermal printers compatible
with other printers.
When trying to preserve compatibility with respect to barcodes, you may not
always be able to make them equal in size. This is due to the various dot-
per-inch differences between printer types. When an exact match cannot be
made, the barcode is reduced in size so that the form bounds will not be
compromised and the barcode will be readable.
Default Use for optimum performance.
Forces the output to correspond with the Printronix

Laser
laser line of printers.
Forces the output to correspond to the P5000 line of

P5000
line matrix printers.
Forces the ouput to correspond to the T3000 line of

T3000
thermal printers.
Forces the output to correspond to the T1006 line of

T1006
thermal printers.
Factory Default Default
Page | 143
Application > Control > PJL Control
Allows you to choose how the PJL (Printer Job Language) protocol is
handled in the printer when sending jobs through the Active IGP Emulation
or LP+.
PJL commands will be ignored and processed like

Disable
other emulation data.
Enable PJL commands will be processed.
Application > PGL Setup
IMPORTANT The PGL Setup submenu will only be present when the Active IGP Emulation is
set to PGL. Otherwise, this menu will be replaced with the Active IGP
Emulation Setup menu.
Application > PGL Setup > Character Group

the character set can be chosen with the menu following XXX Sets. The
group Standard Sets is shown below because it is unique to PGL. All other
groups are similar and described in their respective Programmers
Reference Manuals.
Application > PGL Setup > Standard Sets

This option will show when menu Character Group is set to Standard Sets.
0) ASCII
9) Spanish
1) German
10) Italian
2) Swedish
11) Turkish
3) Danish
12) CP 437
Standard Sets 4) Norwegian
13) CP 850
5) Finnish
14-15) Reserved
6) English
16-23 Dwn Overlay
7) Dutch
24-31) User Def.
8) French
Factory Default 0) ASCII
Page | 144
Application > PGL Setup > Select LPI
This is the number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi
there is 1/6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print
line.
Minimum 1
Maximum 1000
Factory Default 6
Application > PGL Setup > Define CR Code

This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (0D hex) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled,
each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional
Line Feed code (0A hex) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the
host computer sends line feeds to the printer.
Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage

CR = CR
return.
Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return.

CR = CR+LF The next print position will be print position 1 of the
next line.
Factory Default CR = CR
Application > PGL Setup > Define LF Code

This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return
into the data stream whenever a Line Feed occurs. This can be used in
most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send
carriage returns to the printer.
Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The

LF = LF next print position will be at the current print character
position on the next line.
Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print

LF = CR + LF
position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Factory Default LF = LF
Page | 145
Application > PGL Setup > Autowrap
This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of
text exceeds the right margin.
Truncates the text beyond the right margin until a CR

Disable
or CR + LF is received.
Enable Automatically inserts a CR + LF after a full print line.
Application > PGL Setup > Auto Uppercase

This parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase when using
the ALPHA command.
Disable The printer will print text in upper and lowercase.
Enable The printer will print text in uppercase only.
Application > PGL Setup > Slash 0

This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
Disable Zero is printed without a slash.
Enable Zero is printed with a slash.
IMPORTANT This option does not apply to OCR A or OCR B.
Application > PGL Setup > Select SFCC

You can specify which decimal code (1-255) will be used as the Special
Function Control Code (SFCC). The SFCC denotes that the following data
is a PGL command.
Minimum 1
Maximum 255
Factory Default 126
Page | 146
Application > PGL Setup > Host Form Length
Determines how Media > Image > Label Length is affected upon receiving
an EXECUTE command.
The physical label length will change to match the

form length (specified in CREATE command). The
Enable physical label size remains at the new setting until
another EXECUTE command is received, or the
PRINTER CONTROL menu settings are changed.
The physical label length is the longest element

defined in CREATE mode. Works with
Var. Length
CREATE;NAME;0. This includes all dynamic
elements whether used in EXECUTE mode or not.
The physical label length will change to the longest

print element used in EXECUTE mode plus the
Var Dynamic
setting of “Var Form Adjust.” Works with
Len
CREATE;NAME;0. If dynamic elements are not used
in EXECUTE mode, they are not included.
Forms printed in EXECUTE mode do not change the

physical label size. Therefore, the size of the form
Disable
(defined in CREATE mode) must fit within the current
label dimensions, or errors may be reported.
Changing the form length via the EXECUTE

IMPORTANT command changes the LP+ Emulation logical
dimensions.
Application > PGL Setup > Var Form Adjust

This specifies an amount (in tenths of inches) to add to the length of
variable- length forms. Variable-length forms use a semicolon at the end of
the CREATE command: ~CREATE;<FORMNAME>;0.
Typically, variable-length forms are determined by the elements within the
form. The longest form element becomes the overall form length. This
option allows an additional space to be added to the form length.
Minimum 0.0 inches
Maximum 3.0 inches
Page | 147
Application > PGL Setup > Var Form Type
This parameter allows you to manipulate forms created with the CREATE
command to include variable form length parameters.
Add Nothing When selected, no action is taken.
When selected, the form length ends at the longest

Add ;0
printed element. (Same as ~CREATE;filename;0).
When selected, the form length is set to match the

Add ;X
value in Media > Image > Label Length.
Factory Default Add Nothing
Application > PGL Setup > Skip Cmd Prefix

Stands for Skip Command Prefix. This parameter determines if the printer
will print any data before a PGL command is received.
Disable The printer will print all data before a PGL command.
Enable The printer ignores all data before a PGL command.
Application > PGL Setup > Ignore Text

Determines if text in NORMAL mode will be printed or ignored.
When disabled, text in normal mode will be printed.

Disable Attributes to be printed depend on the PGL Normal
menu setting.
When enabled, any line of text (non-PGL commands)

Enable
in normal mode will be ignored.
Page | 148
Application > PGL Setup > Ext Execute Copy
Determines if dynamic text or overlay data is allowed when the Form Count
parameter (number of forms to print) is used as part of the EXECUTE
command.
Dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are not allowed if the

Disable optional Form Count parameter is specified (IGP-100
compatible).
Dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are allowed within a

form where the Form Count parameter is specified. In
Enable
this case, the same form is printed for whatever the
Form Count is.
When enabled, incremental data is not

incremented since the printing page is the same.
IMPORTANT Overlay data is only printed with the first form and
not on subsequent forms, and each form is
printed on a separate page.
Application > PGL Setup > AI 00 Spaces

This option is designated for EAN/UCC-128 barcodes whose application
identifier (AI) is 00.
The printable data field is printed with the AI enclosed

Disable in parentheses. This is the standard EAN/UCC-128
format.
The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields

Enable separated by spaces. This option is IGP-X00
compatible.
Application > PGL Setup > Select SO Char

Allows you to specify a decimal code from 0 through 255 to be used in
place of SO (Shift Out) as the control code which allows access for the
alternate set of control function characters. See the description of the Code
128 barcodes in the PGL Programmer's Reference Manual for details.
Minimum 0
Maximum 255
Factory Default 14
Page | 149
Application > PGL Setup > Ignore Mode
This parameter instructs the IGP to ignore the character selected under the
Select Character menu.
Disable The IGP does not ignore any characters.
The IGP ignores the character specified in the Select

Enable
Char menu.
Application > PGL Setup > Select Char

Instructs the IGP which decimal character (0-255) to ignore from the host.
Minimum 0
Maximum 255
Factory Default 0
Application > PGL Setup > Do FF at TOF

Determines whether the printer, with media already set at the TOF (Top-of-
Form) position, will advance media to the next TOF position upon receipt of
an FF command.
The printer will not advance media from the present

Disable TOF position to the next TOF position upon receipt of
an FF command.
The printer will advance media from the present TOF

Enable position to the next TOF position upon receipt of an
FF command, causing a blank form.
Application > PGL Setup > IGP100 Compatbl.

This parameter forces the output to correspond with IGP-100 line matrix
printer output in cases where there are differences.
In areas of conflict, the printer will be compatible with

Disable
legacy thermal products (best behavior).
The printer will match compatibility in all ways with

Enable
legacy line matrix products.
Page | 150
Application > PGL Setup > Forms Handling
This submenu allows the user to handle the form in various ways.
Disable Standard behavior.
Automatically ejects a page at the end of the job to

Auto Eject
spill out the last page.
Automatically does a form feed (FF) at the end of

Auto TOF
each form to the next top of form.
Application > PGL Setup > PGL Normal

This option determines whether PGL passes the text data in Normal mode
according to LP+ or whether PGL will print the text data itself.
PGL will pass the text data to LP+ only in the default
LP+ Menu setting state (6 LPI, default character set, and font
attribute).
PGL Menu PGL will always print the text data itself.
Factory Default LP+ Menu
Application > PGL Setup > UPC Descenders

This parameter allows you to print bar code descenders when human
readable data is not presented in the UPC/EAN bar codes.
UPC/EAN bar codes are printed with descenders,

Always
even if there is no human readable data.
UPC/EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if

Never
the PDF command is present.
UPC/EAN bar codes are printed with descenders only

Only with PDF
when the PDF command is presented.
Factory Default Always
Page | 151
Application > PGL Setup > I-2/5 Selection
This option is added to be compatible with a special IGP-X00
customization. Usually, if Interleaved 2/5 bar codes have an odd number of
digits, a leading zero is inserted in front of the data. However, this special
IGP-X00 customization gives you the option of adding a space character at
the end of the bar code instead.
Leading Zero A leading zero is inserted in front of the data.
A space is inserted at the end of the data instead of a

Trailing Space
leading zero.
When selected, I-2/5 bar code with a magnification X2

X2 DPD will use the specially configured ratios 3:3:6:5 rather
than 3:6:9:12 for compatibility issues.
The I-2/5 bar code uses a modulo 7 check digit

Modulo 7 CD
instead of the default modulo 10 check digit.
Factory Default Leading Zero
Application > PGL Setup > C39 Compatbl.

This menu makes the old method of decoding C39 alternative character set
compatible with the new.
Disable Uses the proper way of decoding.
Enable Matches the old legacy IGP-100 method of decoding.
Application > PGL Setup > User-Def Ratio

This option allows you to ignore the user-defined barcode ratio and replace
it with the default ratio (X1).
The user-defined barcode ratio will be replaced with

Disable
the default ratio (X1).
Enable User-defined barcode ratios will be used as supplied.
Page | 152
Application > PGL Setup > Lead PDF Dist
Adjusts the leading and trailing character spacing distance of the PDF for
UPC/EAN barcodes. The value can be modified in 0.01 inch increments.
Minimum 0.01 inches
Maximum 0.10 inches
Application > PGL Setup > Trunc Dyn Data

This menu allows the user to truncate the dynamic data up to the maximum
data length specified in Create Mode.
If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data

Disable
length, an error will report.
If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data

Enable
length, the data truncates.
Application > PGL Setup > Boundary Check

This option turns on or off the page boundary check for all print elements.
No out of bound error is reported. The out of bound

Disable
print element prints over the page boundary.
An out of bound error is reported if the print element is

Enable
out of the page boundary.
Application > PGL Setup > Preparser

Allows you to send preparser commands to the printer through any port.
Disable Not using the Preparser command.
The preparser command can be accepted from any

Enable
port.
Page | 153
Application > PGL Setup > Storage Select
Allows the user to map the parameter DISK to either SD (SD card) or
FLASH memory.
Disk=SD Have the DISK command default to the SD card.
Disk=PCB Have the DISK command default to the FLASH

Flash memory.
Have the DISK command default to the DRAM

Disk=DRAM
memory and will be erased upon power-off.
Factory Default Disk=SD
Page | 154
Application > LP+ SETUP
Application > LP+ Setup > Select CPI

This item selects the characters per inch (CPI) value.
Selections 10.0, 12.0, 13.3, 15.0, 17.1, and 20.0 CPI
Factory Default 10.0 CPI
Application > LP+ Setup > Select LPI

This is the number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 LPI
there is 1/6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print
line.
Selections 6.0, 8.0, 10.3 LPI
Factory Default 6.0 LPI
Application > LP+ Setup > Host Command

This item allows you to select certain host commands to be ignored by the
printer.
Enable All host commands accepted by printer.
Ignore All All commands are ignored.
Ignore CPI All CPI commands are ignored.
Ignore LPI All LPI commands are ignored.
Page | 155
Application > LP+ Setup > Typeface
The font style or typeface to be used when printing text.
Letter Gothic is a non-proportional font where all of

Letter Gothic the characters take up the same amount of space
when printed.
Courier is a non-proportional (monospaced) font

Courier where all characters take up the same amount of
space when printed.
OCR-A Optical character recognition font prints only at 10 cpi.
OCR-B Optical character recognition font prints only at 10 cpi.
Factory Default Letter Gothic
Application > LP+ Setup > Prop. Spacing

Each printed character is contained inside a character cell. The width of the
character cell includes the character and the space around the character.
Each character cell is printed with the same width.

Disable
Each column in the printed text will line up.
The width of each character cell varies with the width

of the character. For example, ‘i’ takes less space to
Enable print than ‘m’. Using proportional fonts generally
increases the readability of printed documents, giving
text a typeset appearance.
Application > LP+ Setup > Bold

To determine if the text printed by the LP+ uses a heavy thickness.
Disable Text is printed normally.
Enable Text is printed with a heavy thickness.
Page | 156
Application > LP+ Setup > Italic Print
To determine if the text printed by the LP+ uses italics.
Disable Text is printed normally.
Forward Slant Text is printed with a forward slant.
Backward Slant Text is printed with a backward slant.
Application > LP+ Setup > Slashed Zero

This parameter allows you to print the numeral ‘0’ with or without the slash.
Disable Zero is printed without a slash.
Enable Zero is printed with a slash.
IMPORTANT This option does not apply to OCR-A or OCR-B.
Application > LP+ Setup > Text Position

Specifies where the text will be positioned in the line space.
Top of Line Text is positioned at the top of the line space.
Text is positioned as if it were at the bottom of a line

Bottom of Line space at 6 LPI. The following example picture below
shows both Top of Line and Bottom of Line positions.
Factory Default Bottom of Line
IMPORTANT This option does not apply to OCR-A or OCR-B.
Page | 157
Application > LP+ Setup > Form Length (xx)
Specifies form length in three different units for all preferences of the user:
inches, millimeters, and even lines.
Minimum 0.1 inches
Maximum 99.0 inches (or maximum Label Length)
Application > LP+ Setup > Form Width (xx)

Specifies form width in three different units for all preferences of the user:
inches, millimeters, and even characters. The maximum is allowed beyond
the physical length, but should not be used.
Minimum 0.1 inches
Maximum 13.6 inches
The width should not exceed the actual paper

WARNING width to prevent damage to the platen.
Application > LP+ Setup > Left Margin

Set in characters. Character zero is defined as the far left edge of the
page, and column numbering increments from left to right.
Minimum 0 characters
Maximum 369 characters
Factory Default 0 characters
Application > LP+ Setup > Right Margin

Set in characters. Character zero is defined as the far right edge of the
page, and column numbering increments from right to left.
Minimum 0 characters
Maximum 369 characters
Factory Default 0 characters
Page | 158
Application > LP+ Setup > Top Margin
Defined in linespaces, starting from line zero at the top of the page and
incrementing from the top down.
Minimum 0 linespaces
Maximum 451 linespaces
Factory Default 0 linespaces
Application > LP+ Setup > Bottom Margin

Defined in linespaces, starting from line zero at the bottom of the page and
incrementing from the bottom up.
Minimum 0 line spaces
Maximum 451 line spaces
Factory Default 0 line spaces
Application > LP+ Setup > Print Char. Set

Selecting this executable menu by pressing the ↵ ENTER key causes the
printer to print the currently selected character set.
Application > LP+ Setup > Reset Cmd CFG Ld

When the printer receives a host data stream reset command (ESC @ or
ESC[K) in addition to resetting printer variables, the selected configuration
is loaded.
The active emulation parameters are loaded when the

Disable
reset command is executed.
Power up The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset

Config command is executed.
The currently selected configuration is loaded when

Current config
the reset command is executed.
The factory installed configuration is loaded when the

Factory config
reset command is executed.
Page | 159
Application > P-SERIES Setup
IMPORTANT The P-SERIES Setup submenu will only be present when the LP+ Emulation
menu is set to P-SERIES. Otherwise, this menu will be replaced with the LP+
Emulation menu.
Application > P-Series Setup > Character Group

The group Standard Sets is shown below because it is unique to P-Series.
All other groups are similar and described in LP+, PGL, VGL Character
Sets.
Application > P-Series Setup > Character Set

Note that depending on which value is chosen, other menu(s) can be
unhidden. For example, when IBM PC is selected, a menu Primary Subset
and Extended Subset is available as shown in this table.
When selected, Primary Subset and Extended Subset

IBM PC
menus will be unhidden.
When selected, the Multinational menu will be

Multinational
unhidden.

ECMA Latin 1
DEC Mult When selected, the DEC Mult. menu will be unhidden.
CP 858 EURO No other menus will be unhidden.
Factory Default IBM PC
Upon different choices, menus may be unhidden

IMPORTANT
as described.
Page | 160
Application > P-Series Setup > Primary Subset
Application > P-Series Setup > Multinational
Application > P-Series Setup > DEC Mult.
One of these menus may be available when the Character Group is
Standard Sets. The menu bolded in the right column below is unhidden
and will have options with defaults marked (*). If the Character Set option is
not shown in the left column, none of these menus is available.
Primary Subset
Character Set = ASCII (USA) *, French, German, English, Danish,
IBM PC Swedish, Italian, Spanish, Japanese, French
Canadian, Latin American, Norwegian, Danish II,
Spanish II, Latin Am II
Character Set = Multinational

Multinational ASCII (USA) *, EBCDIC
Primary Subset
Character Set = ASCII (USA) *, German, Swedish, Danish,
ECMA Latin 1 Norwegian, Finnish, English, Dutch, French, Spanish,
Italian, Turkish, Japanese
DEC Mult.
Character Set = ASCII (USA) *, French, German, English,
DEC Mult Norw./Danish, Swedish, Italian, Spanish, Japanese,
French Canadian, Dutch, Finnish, Swiss
Factory Default As shown with asterisk (*).
Application > P-Series Setup > Extended Subset

One of these menus will be available when the Character Group is
Standard Sets. The menu at the right column is unhidden and will have
options as shown with defaults marked (*).If the Character Set option is not
shown in the left column, no menu is unhidden.
Character Set = Extended Subset

IBM PC Code Page 437 *, Code Page 850
Extended Subset
Multinational *, Barcode 10 cpi, Mult. DP 10 cpi, Mult.
Character Set = DP 12 cpi, Mult. LQ 10 cpi, Greek DP 10 cpi, Greek
ECMA Latin 1 DP 12 cpi, Greek LQ 10 cpi, Grap. DP 10 cpi, Grap.
LQ 10 cpi, Sci. DP 10 cpi, Sci. DP 12 cpi, Sci. LQ 10
cpi
Page | 161
Application > P-Series Setup > Horizontal DPI
This feature enables the thermal printer to print images as close as
possible to the same size as those originally programmed for a line matrix
or laser printer by selecting a horizontal resolution that matches that of the
printer that the file was originally generated for.
Although the range allows a selection of up to 400 dpi, the T800 is capable
of printing up to 203 dpi or 300 dpi horizontal resolution, depending on the
print head installed.
Minimum 60
Maximum 400
Factory Default 120
Application > P-Series Setup > Vertical DPI

or laser printer by selecting a vertical resolution that matches that of the
of printing up to 203 dpi or 300 dpi vertical resolution, depending on the
Minimum 72
Maximum 400
Factory Default 72
Application > P-Series Setup > Define CR code

each time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an additional Line
Feed code (0A hex) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends line feeds to the printer.

CR = CR
return.

CR = CR + LF The next print position will be print position 1 of the
next line.
Page | 162
Application > P-Series Setup > Auto LF
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
Disable Discards any data past the forms width.
Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed

Enable
when data is received past the forms width.
Application > P-Series Setup > Define LF Code

This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Line Feed
code (0A hex) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time
the printer receives a line feed, it inserts an additional carriage return code
(0D hex) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer
sends carriage returns to the printer.
Does not insert a carriage return before each line

LF = LF feed. The next print position will be the current print
position of the next line.
Inserts an extra carriage return before each line feed.

LF = CR + LF The next print position will be print position 1 of the
next line.
Factory Default LF = CR + LF
Application > P-Series Setup > Control Code 06

Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code 06 hex (ACK). You can
select an alternate line spacing of 6.0, 8.0, or 10.3 LPI.
Selections 6.0, 8.0, or 10.3 LPI
Application > P-Series Setup > Control Code 08

Control Code 08 defines the function of ASCII code 08 hex (BS). You can
define the code to output an Elongated character or a Backspace.
Elongated Output and Elongated character
Backspace Output and Backspace character
Factory Default Elongated
Page | 163
Application > P-Series Setup > Overstrike
Overstrike determines the action required when a line is printed over a
previous line because a carriage return was received without a line feed.
Replaces the characters from the first line with the

Disable
second line.
Prints the second line on top of the first line making it

Enable
bolder.
Application > P-Series Setup > Select SFCC

This P-Series feature allows you to select an ASCII code which defines the
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) command code value. The factory
default value is hex 01, but the P-Series options allow selection of any
value ranging from hex 00 through hex 7F. This powerful feature permits
the SFCC code to be assigned a value compatible with the application
environment where the P-Series jobs originate. The most commonly used
values include the following: SOH (01 hex), ESC (1B hex), ETX (03 hex), ^
(5E hex), and ~ (7E hex).
Minimum 00 hex
Maximum 7F hex
Factory Default 01 hex
Non-Printable ASCII code values range from hex

00 through hex 1F and also include hex 7F.
Printable ASCII code values range from hex 20
through hex 7E. If a printable code value is
chosen to define the SFCC code value, you must
IMPORTANT ensure that the printer data stream will not
contain the same code value in printable text.
Otherwise text containing the character for the
SFCC control code value may be incorrectly
processed as an SFCC command causing print
errors.
Application > P-Series Setup > EVFU Select

Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting.
Disable Disables all EVFU processing.
Selects P-Series compatible Electronic Vertical

Enable
Format Unit (EVFU).
Page | 164
Application > P-Series Setup > Alt. Set 80-9F
Determines how data in the range 80 hex – 9F hex will be treated.
Control Code Interprets as a control code.
Printable Prints data in this range.
Factory Default Control Code.
Application > P-Series Setup > SFCC d command

This menu option is for backward compatibility.
This option interprets the SFCC d command as even

Even dot plot
dot plot.
This option interprets the SFCC d command as

Double High double high. Select this option for backward
compatibility.
Factory Default Even dot plot
Application > P-Series Setup > PSeries Dbl High

This menu option allows printing compatibility between the current and
older models of Printronix printers.
This is normal Double High printing for current model

Normal
printers.
Where older printers printed two dot rows higher, this

P3/4/6/9 option allows for compatibility by raising the print two
Compat. dot rows to match the current models dot row value
(two dot rows lower).
Factory Default Normal
Application > P-Series Setup > FF valid at TOF

The FF valid at TOF option determines whether the printer will perform a
Form Feed when the host sends a Form Feed command, if the printer is at
the top of form.
Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a

Disable
Form Feed and the printer is at the top of form.
Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form

Enable
Feed and the printer is at the top of form.
Page | 165
Application > P-SERIES XQ Setup
IMPORTANT The P-SERIES XQ Setup submenu will only be present when the LP+ Emulation
menu is set to P-SERIES XQ. Otherwise, this menu will be replaced with the
LP+ Emulation menu.
IMPORTANT This LP+ emulation does not have any specific Character Group or Character
Set selection.
Application > P-Series XQ Setup > Horizontal DPI

Minimum 60
Maximum 400
Factory Default 120
Application > P-Series XQ Setup > Vertical DPI

Minimum 72
Maximum 400
Factory Default 72
Page | 166
Application > P-Series XQ Setup > Define CR code

CR = CR
return.

next line.
Application > P-Series XQ Setup > Auto LF


Enable
Application > P-Series XQ Setup > Define LF Code



next line.
Factory Default LF = CR + LF
Page | 167
Application > P-Series XQ Setup > Control Code 06
Application > P-Series XQ Setup > Compressed Print

Controls which host command enables compressed printing.
Char 01 SOH
Char 03 ETX
Char 09 HT
Factory Default Char 01 SOH
Application > P-Series XQ Setup > Elong/Alt. Font

Controls which host command sets elongated (double high) fonts and
extended character set.
ELNG=BS Elongated set by BS (08 hex), extended character set

FONT=SO set by SO (0E hex).
ELNG=SO Elongated set by SO (0E hex), extended character set

FONT=BS set by BS (08 hex).
Factory Default Elng=BS FONT=SO
Application > P-Series XQ Setup > Gothic Typeface

Controls which host command sets Gothic printing.
Char 02 STX
Char 03 ETX
Char 09 HT
Factory Default Char 02 STX
Page | 168
Application > P-Series XQ Setup > EVFU Select
Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting.
Disable Disables all EVFU processing.
Selects P-Series compatible Electronic Vertical

Enable
Format Unit (EVFU).
Application > P-Series XQ Setup > Upr. Case Select

Controls how the printer handles lowercase characters it receives from the
host computer. When enabled, all characters are printed in uppercase.
Prints lowercase characters received from the host

Disable computer as lowercase; prints uppercase characters
received from the computer as uppercase.
Prints lowercase characters received from the host

computer as their corresponding uppercase
Enable
equivalents; prints uppercase characters received
from the computer as uppercase.
Application > P-Series XQ Setup > Slew Relative

“Slewing” is rapid vertical paper movement. This parameter determines the
number of lines slewed (either 1-15 lines or 1-16 lines) when an EVFU
Slew Relative command is received.
1-15 lines
1-16 lines
Factory Default 1-15 lines
Page | 169
Application > Serial Matrix Setup
IMPORTANT The Serial Matrix Setup submenu will only be present when the LP+ Emulation
menu is set to Serial Matrix. Otherwise, this menu will be replaced with the LP+
Emulation menu.
Application > Serial Matrix Setup > Character Group

The group Standard Sets is shown below because it is unique to Serial
Matrix. All other groups are similar and described in LP+, PGL, VGL
Character Sets.
Application > Serial Matrix Setup > Character Set

unhidden. For example, when IBM PC is selected, a menu Primary Subset
and Extended Subset is available as shown in this table.

IBM PC

Multinational
unhidden.

ECMA Latin 1
DEC Mult When selected, the DEC Mult. menu will be unhidden.
CP 858 EURO No other menus will be unhidden.
Factory Default IBM PC

IMPORTANT
as described.
Page | 170
Application > Serial Matrix Setup > Primary Subset
Application > Serial Matrix Setup > Multinational
Application > Serial Matrix Setup > DEC Mult.
Primary Subset
Character Set = ASCII (USA) *, French, German, English, Danish,
IBM PC Swedish, Italian, Spanish, Japanese, French
Canadian, Latin American, Norwegian, Danish II,
Spanish II, Latin Am II

Primary Subset
Character Set = ASCII (USA) *, German, Swedish, Danish,
ECMA Latin 1 Norwegian, Finnish, English, Dutch, French, Spanish,
Italian, Turkish, Japanese
DEC Mult.
Character Set = ASCII (USA) *, French, German, English,
DEC Mult Norw./Danish, Swedish, Italian, Spanish, Japanese,
French Canadian, Dutch, Finnish, Swiss
Application > Serial Matrix Setup > Extended Subset

One of these menus will be available when the Character Group is
Standard Sets. The menu at the right column is unhidden and will have
options as shown with defaults marked (*).If the Character Set option is not
shown in the left column, no menu is unhidden.
Character Set = Extended Subset

IBM PC Code Page 437 *, Code Page 850
Extended Subset
Multinational *, Barcode 10 cpi, Mult. DP 10 cpi, Mult.
Character Set = DP 12 cpi, Mult. LQ 10 cpi, Greek DP 10 cpi, Greek
ECMA Latin 1 DP 12 cpi, Greek LQ 10 cpi, Grap. DP 10 cpi, Grap.
LQ 10 cpi, Sci. DP 10 cpi, Sci. DP 12 cpi, Sci. LQ 10
cpi
Page | 171
Application > Serial Matrix Setup > Horizontal DPI
Minimum 60
Maximum 400
Factory Default 120
Application > Serial Matrix Setup > Vertical DPI

Minimum 72
Maximum 400
Factory Default 72
Application > Serial Matrix Setup > Define CR code


CR = CR
return.

next line.
Page | 172
Application > Serial Matrix Setup > Auto LF

Enable
Application > Serial Matrix Setup > Define LF Code



next line.
Application > Serial Matrix Setup > Control Code 06

Application > Serial Matrix Setup > Overstrike

Overstrike determines the action required when a line is printed over a
previous line because a carriage return was received without a line feed.
Replaces the characters from the first line with the

Disable
second line.
Prints the second line on top of the first line making it

Enable
bolder.
Page | 173
Application > Serial Matrix Setup > Printer Select
Determines if control codes DC1 and DC3 will ignored or used to disable or
enable the printer, respectively.
Disable Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
Disables the printer when control code DC1 is

Enable received and enables the printer when DC3 is
received.
Application > Serial Matrix Setup > Alt. Set 80-9F

Application > Serial Matrix Setup > ESC d Command

This item is for backward compatibility.
This option interprets the ESC d command as even

Even dot plot
dot plot.
This option interprets the ESC d command as double

Double high
high. Select this option for backward compatibility.
Factory Default Even dot plot.
Application > Proprinter Setup
IMPORTANT The Proprinter Setup submenu will only be present when the LP+ Emulation
menu is set to Proprinter XL. Otherwise, this menu will be replaced with the
LP+ Emulation menu.
Application > Proprinter Setup > Character Group

The group Standard Sets is shown below because it is unique to
Proprinter. All other groups are similar and described in LP+, PGL, VGL
Character Sets
Page | 174
Application > Proprinter Setup > Character Set
Code Page 437 * Code Page 437 set
Code Page 850 Code Page 850 set
OCR-A OCR-A set
OCR-B OCR-B set
ASCII (USA) *
Multinational
EBCDIC
CP 858 EURO CP 858 EURO
Factory Default Those above with asterisk *
Application > Proprinter Setup > Horizontal DPI

Minimum 60
Maximum 400
Factory Default 120
Application > Proprinter Setup > Vertical DPI

Minimum 72
Maximum 400
Factory Default 72
Page | 175
Application > Proprinter Setup > Define CR code

CR = CR
return.

next line.
Application > Proprinter Setup > Auto LF


Enable
Application > Proprinter Setup > Define LF Code



next line.
Page | 176
Application > Proprinter Setup > 20 CPI Condensed
Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.
This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum
amount of information on a page.
Does not compress print widths, even if condensed

Disable
print is chosen by the host.
Prints about 60% of the width of normal characters

Enable when compressed print is chosen by the host
computer.
Application > Proprinter Setup > FF valid at TOF

The FF valid at TOF option determines whether the printer will perform a
Form Feed when the host sends a Form Feed command, if the printer is at
the top of form.
Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a

Disable
Form Feed and the printer is at the top of form.
Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form

Enable
Feed and the printer is at the top of form.
Application > Proprinter Setup > Alt. Char Set

Determines how control codes hex 80-9F are handled.
Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F

Set 1
as a control code.
Set 2 Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
Factory Default Set 1
Page | 177
Application > Epson FX Setup
IMPORTANT The Epson FX Setup submenu will only be present when the LP+ Emulation
menu is set to Epson FX. Otherwise, this menu will be replaced with the LP+
Emulation menu.
Application > Epson FX Setup > Character Group

The group Standard Sets is shown below because it is unique to Epson
FX. All other groups are similar and described in LP+, PGL, VGL Character
Sets.
Application > Epson FX Setup > Character Set

unhidden. For example, when Epson Set is selected, a menu Epson Set is
available.
Epson Set When selected, the Epson Set menu will be unhidden.
OCR-A OCR-A selected.
OCR-B OCR-B selected.

Multinational
unhidden.
Code Page 850 Code Page 850. No other menus will be unhidden.
CP 858 EURO CP 858 EURO. No other menus will be unhidden.
IBM PC IBM PC set. No other menus will be unhidden.
Factory Default Epson Set

IMPORTANT
as described.
Page | 178
Application > Epson FX Setup > Epson Set
Application > Epson FX Setup > Multinational
Epson Set
Character Set = ASCII (USA) *, French, German, English, Danish I,
Epson Set Swedish, Italian, Spanish I, Japanese, Norwegian,
Danish II, Latin Am II, French Canadian, Latin Am I

Application > Epson FX Setup > Horizontal DPI

Minimum 60
Maximum 400
Factory Default 120
Application > Epson FX Setup > Vertical DPI

Minimum 72
Maximum 400
Factory Default 72
Page | 179
Application > Epson FX Setup > Define CR code

CR = CR
return.

next line.
Application > Epson FX Setup > Auto LF


Enable
Application > Epson FX Setup > Define LF Code



next line.
Page | 180
Application > Epson FX Setup > Printer Select
Determines if control codes DC1 and DC3 will ignored or used to disable or
enable the printer, respectively.
Disable Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
Disables the printer when control code DC1 is

Enable received and enables the printer when DC3 is
received.
Application > Epson FX Setup > 20 CPI Condensed

Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.
This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum
amount of information on a page.
Does not compress print widths, even if condensed

Disable
print is chosen by the host.
Prints about 60% of the width of normal characters

Enable when compressed print is chosen by the host
computer.
Application > Epson FX Setup > Alt. Set 80-9F

Page | 181
Application > Fonts
Application > Fonts > Standard Chars.

This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of
standard text fonts.
Minimum 0
Maximum 512
Factory Default 340
Application > Fonts > Bold Chars.

This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of bold
text fonts.
Minimum 0
Maximum 512
Factory Default 448
Application > Fonts > Extra Bold Chars

This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of extra
bold text fonts.
Minimum 0
Maximum 512
Factory Default 504
Application > Fonts > OCR-A Chars.

Character weight adjustment of resident OCR-A characters.
Minimum 0
Maximum 512
Factory Default 384
Page | 182
Application > Fonts > OCR-B Chars.
Character weight adjustment of resident OCR-B characters.
Minimum 0
Maximum 512
Factory Default 304
Application > Fonts > TT Reg Chars.

This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of
standard TrueType fonts.
Minimum 0
Maximum 512
Factory Default 382
Application > Fonts > TT Bold Chars.

This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of bold
TrueType fonts.
Minimum 0
Maximum 512
Factory Default 448
Application > Fonts > Tall Characters

Increases the point height of resident Intellifont characters.
Standard resident font character point height is

Disable
maintained.
Increases the point height of resident Intellifont

Enable
characters approximately 10%.
Page | 183
Configs
Configs > Control
Configs > Control > Save Config

This option allows you to save up to eight unique configurations to meet
different print job requirements. This eliminates the need to change the
parameter settings for each new job. The configurations are stored in
memory and will not be lost if you turn off the printer. The factory default
configuration cannot be changed.
Minimum 1
Maximum 8
Factory Default 1
Configs > Control > Load Config

The printer can store up to eight configurations in memory. This parameter
allows you to select and load a specific configuration.
Factory The factory configuration is the default.
1-8 Different saved configurations.
Factory Default Factory
Configs > Control > Print Config

This option is used to print a listing of various stored printer configurations.
We recommend you store printouts of your configurations in a safe place
for quick referral.
Current The current configuration loaded in DRAM.
Factory The default factory configuration.
Power-Up The configuration chosen as the power-up config.
All All saved configurations, including factory.
1-8 Specific saved configuration selected.
Factory Default Current
Page | 184
Configs > Control > Delete Config
You can delete one or all of your eight customized configurations. The
Factory default configuration cannot be deleted.
All All configurations will be deleted, except Factory.
1-8 Specific saved configuration will be deleted.
Factory Default All
Configs > Control > Power-Up Config

You can specify any one of nine configurations (1-8 saved custom
configurations or Factory) as the power-up configuration.
Factory The Factory configuration is the power-up default.
1-8 Specific saved configuration will be the default config.
Factory Default Factory
Configs > Control > Auto Save

You can Enable or Disable the Auto Save feature
Disable The Auto Save feature is disabled
Enable The Auto Save feature is enabled
The value for this menu is not part of the normal

IMPORTANT saved configuration. Loading another configuration
will affect this value
Configs > Custom
Configs > Custom > Name Config 1 … Name Config 8

Using the virtual keyboard of the UI, you may specify a 15-character name
which can be used to refer to a configuration. The name you enter for a
configuration will be used in the Load Config, Save Config, Print Config,
Delete Config, and Power-Up Config menus. The names can only be
cleared by using the Reset Cfg Names menu.
String Any 15-character string using UI keyboard.
Factory Default Config 1 … Config 8
Page | 185
Configs > Custom > Reset Cfg Names
You can reset specific configuration names back to the default value of the
configuration number.
All Reset all custom configuration names.
1-8 Reset a specific custom configuration name.
Factory Default 1
Page | 186
Tools
Tools > Print Tests
Tools > Print Tests > Run Tests

The printer tests below allow you to check for proper printer operation and
print quality. Once you have selected the desired test, press the ENTER
key to start printing. If the Test Count option (below) is set to Continuous,
press ENTER key again to stop printing.
Senses paper out, perforation, gap, or mark, and

Auto Calibrate
calibrates the printer for the currently installed media.
This pattern helps identify marginal printhead

Checkerboard elements, quality of edge sharpness, and uneven
print quality.
This pattern helps identify burned out printhead

Grey
elements and uneven print quality.
This pattern helps identify edge sharpness and

Grid
uneven print quality.
Prints the current printer configuration and helps

Current Config identify the text print quality. Includes printhead
statistical data in the header.
Prints a pattern containing a series of ladder-type bar

code symbols, starting with four and decrementing by
Left Test one symbol on each print until a single symbol prints
on the left side. This pattern helps identify ribbon
wrinkle problems.
Prints a pattern containing a series of ladder-type bar

code symbols, starting with four and decrementing by
Right Test one symbol on each print until a single symbol prints
on the right side. This pattern helps identify ribbon
wrinkle problems.
Combo Test Prints a combined left test and right test.
Ethernet Test Prints the Network Interface statistics.
Prints text and picket barcodes with the barcodes

positioned at the left and right margins of the standard
Barcode Demo label media supplied with the printer.
1D
NOTE: The printer is automatically put ONLINE
before printing begins.
Page | 187
Tools > Print Tests > Run Tests
Prints picket, ladder, and 2-D barcodes with the
barcodes positioned at the left and right margins of
Barcode Demo the standard label media supplied with the printer.
2D
NOTE: The printer is automatically put ONLINE
before printing begins.
Prints detailed information about the most recent

Novram related failure. This option is useful when the
Novram Err Log control panel faults with “Bad NVM” or “ILL NVM” type
errors. Contact the Customer Support Center if
such an error occurs.
Prints various patterns on one page that help in the

assessment of print quality, including Grey,
Print Quality Checkerboard, and text. Number of patterns
depends on the current form length. This test should
be run on at least 6-inch media for the full test print.
This pattern helps identify edge sharpness and

Fine Grid uneven print quality, but uses a much smaller grid
than the earlier “Grid” selection above.
Factory Default Auto Calibrate
Tools > Print Tests > Test Count

This item selects the number of times the selected test pattern will be
printed.
Print continuously until the user stops the test by

Continuous
printing the ENTER key.
Choose among 1 Page, 2 Pages, 5 Pages, or 10

Selections
Pages.
Factory Default Continuous
Tools > Diagnostics
Tools > Diagnostics > Print Error Log

This executable menu prints the current log of errors. Most non-routine
faults (RIBBON FAULT, PRINT HEAD HOT) are stored in the error log.
Tools > Diagnostics > Clear Error Log

This executable menu clears the error log.
Page | 188
Tools > Diagnostics > Hex Dump Mode
This turns on the hex dump diagnostic. See Troubleshooting Common
Situations for more information.
Disable Hex dump mode is turned off.
Hex dump mode is turned on and all incoming data

Enable
will be printed in hexadecimal format.
Tools > Diagnostics > Job Capture

Enable a job capture function. The procedure is to enable this menu, send
the job of interest, then disable the menu. Once this procedure is
completed, a file Job_XX.cap (e.g., Job_01.cap) will be saved to either the
USB Drive, SD card, or Flash memory (in that order of priority). More than
one capture can be made. When enabling this feature again, another
Job_XX.cap file will be saved (e.g., Job_02.cap)..
Disable Disable the Job Capture.
Enable Enable the Job Capture.
Tools > Diagnostics > Label Capture

This feature can be used to save a label bitmap to a PNG file on the USB
drive, SD card, or Flash File system (in that order of priority). The value set
in the menu provides the number of labels to be saved. As each label is
printed, the menu value will automatically decrement back to zero and will
then be disabled. Files will be saved with names in the format of
Page_XXX.PNG (e.g., Page_001.png, Page_002.png, …).
Minimum 0 (Feature is disabled)
Maximum 5 (Number of labels to be captured)
Factory Default 0
Page | 189
Tools > Advanced
This set of tools are advanced types of debugging that need to be coordinated with Printronix Customer
Support. They capture information that only the Engineering can decipher. This section was designed to
make it easier for Customer Support to acquire such information from the end user by storing diagnostic
data/files into the printer flash, SD card, or USB drive. No longer is Customer Support necessarily
required to install a special debug cable and be on site to capture valuable diagnostics.
Each different diagnostic in this section will store files in the printer’s file system using different names.
For example, in the case of auto dump files, a set of files “AUTODP*.LOG” (AUTODP1a.LOG,
AUTODP1b.LOG, etc) will be stored in the printer’s flash file system. Diagnostics files stored in flash can
be uploaded on an individual basis using the NIC webpage, PrintNet Enterprise Suite, or collectively and
easily by using the menu Tools > Advanced > Copy to SD, or menu Tools > Advanced > Copy to
USB. Once all such diagnostic files are acquired, it can be sent to Printronix Customer Support.
Note that the printer can store multiple diagnostic results. For example, if the first System Dump menu
was executed, files “SYS_DP1*.LOG” would be stored. If that same menu was executed at a later time,
the files “SYS_DP2*.LOG” would then be stored.
Tools > Advanced > Auto Dump

When enabled, there is an automatic capture of debug information when a
processor fault occurs. This information is stored in the flash file system as
a set of files “AUTODP*.LOG” (AUTODP1a.LOG, AUTODP1b.LOG, etc).
The files can be easily uploaded as described above.
Disable Auto dump mode is turned off.
A dump file is automatically created and stored in

FLASH memory as “AUTODP*.LOG” when the
Enable processor fault occurs. Reboot after the fault and
retrieve this file using one of the methods mentioned
above.
Once a file is stored in FLASH, it will not be

replaced with a new file if another problem
IMPORTANT occurs. This is done to prevent FLASH memory
from filling over time.
Tools > Advanced > System Dump

When executed, the system temporarily goes into a HALT mode (white
screen flashes) and stores files “SYS_DP*.LOG” which hold similar
information saved for the Auto dump case.
When the processed is finished, the printer

should come out of HALT mode and operation
should continue. However, there are situations in
IMPORTANT the printer cannot recover from the HALT
process. If this happens, reboot the printer and
then recover the SYS_DP*.LOG files.
Page | 190
Tools > Advanced > Debug Setup
If a file “custflag.dbg” is created by Printronix Customer Support, it can be
passed onto the end user to be downloaded into the printer. Such a file
would be used to enable certain embedded diagnostic flags in the
firmware. If this file is present, then the menu Debug Setup is unhidden.
Note that if the “custflag.dbg” is not downloaded, the menu Debug Capture
is still available with some default level of diagnostic capture.
Typically, the user would execute the Debug Setup menu, then run the
problem scenario, followed by executing the menu Debug Capture. This
would capture the debug information in files named “DBG_DP*.LOG”.
Tools > Advanced > Debug Capture

If a file “custflag.dbg” is created by Printronix Customer Support, it can be
passed onto the end user to be downloaded into the printer. Such a file
would be used to enable certain embedded diagnostic flags in the
firmware. If this file is present, then the menu Debug Setup is unhidden.
Note that if the “custflag.dbg” is not downloaded, the menu Debug Capture
is still available with some default level of diagnostic capture.
Typically, the user would execute the Debug Setup menu, then run the
problem scenario, followed by executing the menu Debug Capture. This
would capture the debug information in files named “DBG_DP*.LOG”.
Tools > Advanced > Copy to SD

If the SD card is present in the printer, users can quickly and easily copy all
diagnostic files from the flash system to the SD card in one simple step
instead of having to individually find those files using NIC webpage or
within the System > Flash File Edit > Copy to SD menu.
Tools > Advanced > Copy to USB

If the USB drive is present in the printer, users can quickly and easily copy
all diagnostic files from the flash system to the USB drive in one simple
step instead of having to individually find those files using NIC webpage or
within the System > Flash File Edit > Copy to USB menu.
Tools > Advanced > Delete & Optimize

After the diagnostic files have been uploaded from the flash system or the
user decides they are no longer needed, they can be easily deleted in one
simple step by executing this menu.
Furthermore, after deleting the files, the system will perform a System >
Flash File Edit > Optimize & Reboot operation automatically so that the
flash resources are freed.
Page | 191
Tools > PTF Debug
This PTF (Printronix Trace Facility) diagnostics tool is used to trace real-time activities in the printer. Any
use of this function must be coordinated with Printronix Customer Support. This tool was designed to
make it easier for Customer Support to acquire such information by storing PTF trace files into the printer
flash, SD card, or USB drive without requiring the end user install a special debug cable and be on site to
capture valuable information.
The PTF diagnostic files saved are named “PTF_DP*.LOG” (PTF_DP1a.LOG, PTF_DP1b.LOG, etc) and
stored in the printer’s USB drive (if installed), SD card (if installed), or flash memory. If stored in flash
memory, such files can be uploaded on an individual basis using the NIC webpage, PrintNet Enterprise
Suite, or collectively and easily by using the menu Tools > Advanced > Copy to SD, or menu Tools >
Advanced > Copy to USB. Once all such diagnostic files are acquired, they should be sent to Printronix
Customer Support.
Note that the printer can store multiple diagnostic results. For example, if the first PTF Debug > Save
Trace menu was executed, files “PTF_DP1*.LOG” would be stored. If that same menu was executed a
second time, the files “PTF_DP2*.LOG” would then be stored, and so forth.
Tools > PTF Debug > Buffer Size

This menu reserves an internal trace buffer (DRAM) needed to capture the
PTF data. Depending on the type of failure and the length of time needed
to create it, the buffer might need to increase or decrease.
Minimum 0 KB (no PTF trace buffer available)
Maximum 1 MB (largest PTF trace buffer possible)
Factory Default 4 KB
The size of the actual PTF_DP*.LOG files saved

IMPORTANT will vary based on how much of the trace buffer is
actually used.
Tools > PTF Debug > Clear Trace

Clears the PTF internal trace buffer so that new information can be
gathered at the beginning. This is useful to reset trace data prior to creating
a failure event.
Tools > Advanced > Save Trace

This dumps the PTF trace buffer to files named with the format
“PTF_DP*.LOG” as described earlier in this section.
Tools > PTF Flags

This section is used to select certain areas of the PSA system to debug with PTF tracing. These menus
would only be modified with the direction of Customer Support. The different menus will be listed but do
not need a detailed explanation.
All menus below are Enable/Disable.
Page | 192
Tools > PTF Flags > Global Enable
This menu enables the use of the PTF trace facility.
Tools > PTF Flags > Configuration

This menu enables information related to menu and printer configuration.
Tools > PTF Flags > Structures

This menu is reserved to provide information related to major internal data
structures.
Tools > PTF Flags > Messages

This menu enables information about inter-task messaging.
Tools > PTF Flags > Host IO

This menu is reserved for tracing host IO drivers.
Tools > PTF Flags > Command

This menu is reserved for tracing emulation command parsing.
Tools > PTF Flags > Text

This menu is reserved for tracing emulation text and font selection.
Tools > Statistics

All of the menus shown here are read-only.
Page | 193
Tools > Statistics > Printer On Time
Displays the cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on.
This value is set to zero at the factory.
Tools > Statistics > Total Media Dist

Displays the cumulative number of inches the printer has moved media.
This value is set to zero at the factory.
Tools > Statistics > Total Label Count

Displays the cumulative number of labels printed, regardless of size. This
value is set to zero at the factory.
Tools > Statistics > Head On Time

Displays the time that power has been applied to the printhead since its
installation. This value is kept with each printhead and updated
automatically when a different printhead is installed.
Tools > Statistics > Head Print Dist

Displays the length of media actually printed since the last Reset Head
Data operation. This value is set to zero at the factory.
Tools > Statistics > Head Life (Standard)

Displays the percent of life left in the print head.
Page | 194
Tools > About
All of the menus shown here are read-only.
Tools > About > Controller Board Version

Displays the Controller board version.
Tools > About > Head DPI

Displays the printhead type installed in dots per inch (203 dpi or 300 dpi).
Tools > About > FLASH Installed

Displays the total FLASH memory installed (128 MB).
Tools > About > DRAM Installed

Displays the total DRAM memory installed (128 MB).
Tools > About > CPU Clock

Displays the current speed of the main processor.
Tools > About > Printer F/W

Displays the printer firmware version and part number.
Tools > About > RFID Reader F/W

Displays the RFID reader firmware version (if installed).
Tools > About > RFID Reader Hd/W

Displays the RFID reader hardware version. (if ThingMagic RFID reader is
installed)
Tools > About > Wifi F/W

Displays the Wifi firmware version (if installed).
Page | 195
Tools > About > Feature File
Displays the feature file part number (if present).
Page | 196
RFID
When equipped with the RFID option, the RFID ICON will always appear, but will be in grey when the
RFID is disabled. When enabled, the icon will appear in color. This section will show how the RFID menu
is organized. Please see the RFID Labeling Reference Manual available on our website for a detailed
description of how these menus work and interact.
RFID > Control

• RFID Active
• Error Handling
• Label Retry
• Max Retry Error
• Overstrike Style
• EPC Write Control
• AutoID Mgr Rpt
• Non-RFID Warning
RFID > Tag Calibration

• RFID Calibrate
• Start Position
• End Position
• Test EPC Length
RFID > Calibration Param

• Operation Order
• Speed While Encode
• Tag Position
• Move to Encode
• Tag Pos Adjust
• Write Power
• Read Power
RFID > RFID Chip Param

• USR Size
• TID Size
• Tag Length
• Block Size
RFID > Diagnostics

• Read Tag
• Read Tag & Eject
• Read USR
Page | 197
• Read TID
• Tag ID
• Silicon Name
• Read PC
• Tag PC
• Write EPC with 1s
• Write EPC with 2s
RFID > Statistics

• Read Tags Passed
• Write Tags Fail
• Read Tags Fail
• Lock Tags Fail
• Clear Tag Stats
• RFID Reader F/W
• RFID Reader Hd/W
Page | 198
4 Downloading Firmware
There is 128 MB of FLASH memory on the controller board. The printer firmware which includes printer
control languages (the “emulations”), the engine control, and printer operating system software are loaded
into FLASH memory at the factory, but there are occasions when you may have to load this software:
• Firmware upgrade to a newer level
• Replacing a controller or reloading firmware if FLASH becomes corrupt.
Once you have the target firmware copied onto your local PC or SD card, you can employ one of the
various download methods presented in this section. Some methods even allow use of the USB drive.
Downloading firmware can be accomplished through any host IO installed on the printer, but may not be
valid for all methods.
IMPORTANT The target firmware must be consistent with the options present in the
controller Security Key. Otherwise, the firmware download will be prevented.
With exception to the manual two-key and manual three-key power-up sequences, downloading new
firmware does not require the user to put the printer into any special mode. Now downloading methods
are employed when the printer is ONLINE and ready to receive data. This makes the download procedure
easy.
FLASH is used to store the firmware, but it also contains a file system that holds System and User Flash
Files. User Flash Files consist of downloaded fonts, logos, forms, setup files, feature files, CST files, and
files that are specific to the user’s setup or application. These files are either preserved or deleted based
on the download method used as shown in Table 7.
IMPORTANT Regardless of download method, any saved configurations will be erased.
Before starting a download procedure, be sure that you have printed or saved
configurations on your host computer or using PrintNet Enterprise Suite so
they can be restored after the download process is complete.
NOTE: When the firmware download has completed, the FLASH memory will automatically be
optimized to maximize the amount of available FLASH memory.
Page | 199
Table 7. Firmware Download Methods
User FLASH
Firmware Download Method File Type(s)
Files
Web Page (Ethernet or WiFi). User needs the network

configured, a browser, and know the IP address. FILENAME.prg Preserved
Automatic download (any host IO). Using the

FILENAME.exe, firmware can be downloaded from a
Windows Command Prompt without having to manually put FILENAME.exe Preserved
the printer into download mode.
Manual two-key download (any host IO). This two-key

(LEFT SOFT KEY + RIGHT SOFT KEY) power-up
sequence puts the printer into download mode. Firmware
can be loaded through any host IO port. FILENAME.exe
FILENAME.prg
can be downloaded through the USB port using the -pb Preserved
FILENAME.exe
option. Do not use the Manual two-key download for
FILENAME.exe using the Ethernet or Wifi using the -n
option.
Manual two-key download (USB Drive or SD Card). This

two-key (LEFT SOFT KEY + RIGHT SOFT KEY) power-up
sequence puts the printer into download mode. Firmware FILENAME.prg
program file (.prg) must be copied to the USB drive or SD renamed to Preserved
card and renamed “UPGRADE”. “UPGRADE”
Manual three-key download (SD Card). This three-key

power-up sequence (LEFT SOFT KEY + RIGHT SOFT
KEY + DOWN ARROW) should be used in situations in FILENAME.prg
which a new controller is installed, the program in FLASH is renamed to Deleted
corrupt, or a different firmware type will be installed. “UPGRADE”
Firmware program file (.prg) must be copied to the SD card
and renamed “UPGRADE”.
PrintNet Enterprise (Ethernet only). Users may install the
PrintNet Enterprise application from the company’s For a detailed description, refer
website This is the most versatile and powerful method to to the PrintNet Ethernet User's
upgrade printers but requires your computer to run Java™ Manual.
programs.
Firmware File Types (.prg) and (.exe)

Using firmware with an .exe extension FILENAME.exe is convenient. However, firmware with the .exe
extension may not be available in all situations. The FILENAME.prg file can be extracted from the
FILENAME.exe file by running the .exe file like an application. This will extract the FILENAME.prg file in
the same directory where FILENAME.exe was executed.
For example, executing 123456.exe in directory C:\download will generate a file C:\download\123456.prg.
Running the FILENAME.exe on a command line with the -h option will display help information.
Page | 200
Web Page Download
NOTE: This download method requires firmware with the .prg extension FILENAME.prg.
1. Make sure the printer is powered up, in ONLINE mode, and that the Ethernet cable is connected or
Wifi is active.
2. Get the IP address from the front panel ONLINE screen (or under Network in Settings ).
3. Enter the printer’s IP address in your browser (e.g., http://10.224.5.21).
4. When prompted for a user name and password, enter “root” for user name and click OK.
5. Click “System” in the Configuration box.
Figure 2 System Configuration Upgrade

6. Click the “Upgrade” button.
7. Browse to the directory or enter FILENAME.prg in the “File to upload” field and click
“Upgrade”. A Warning message opens.
Figure 3 Uploading Firmware File for Upgrade

8. Click “Ok” to continue. After a few minutes, you are prompted to reboot.
9. Click “Yes”.
Page | 201
Figure 4 Confirm Reboot
10. Wait until the printer is finished upgrading firmware.
Figure 5 Waiting for Firmware Upgrade Completion

11. When the Web Page is redirected, the download process in complete.
Page | 202
Automatic Download (.exe)
The firmware can be downloaded without requiring the user to manually put the printer into download
mode.
NOTE: This download method requires firmware in the form FILENAME.exe, which should be a six
digit number with the .exe extension (e.g., 123456.exe).
1. Make sure the printer is powered up, in ONLINE mode, and that the applicable host IO cables are
connected.
2. Navigate to the directory where the target firmware resides.
IMPORTANT For USB connections, the Windows Driver must be installed.
3. Install the Windows Driver provided on our company’s website. During the installation, make sure to
share the printer when prompted and record the “Share name”.
Figure 6 Selecting to Share the Printer

IMPORTANT For USB connections, the printer must have a “Share name” established.
4. The “Share name” will be needed when executing the FILENAME.exe command. This should be
accomplished during installation, but can be verified at any time. Select the driver, right-click the
mouse button and select “Printer Properties”. Click the “Sharing” tab, make sure the “Share this
printer” box is check marked, and enter the “Share name”.
Page | 203
Figure 7 Setting Printer Properties Sharing Options
5. Start a Windows Command Prompt session.

6. Navigate to the directory with the target firmware (e.g., c:\download).
7. Execute FILENAME.exe as follows:
Connection Type Enter Command
USB FILENAME –a –pbSharedName <Enter>

where SharedName of the printer is the ‘Share
name’ entered during installation.
Ethernet FILENAME -n xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx <Enter>
where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx represents the IP address.
WARNING DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started. Interrupting a
download will leave the flash memory incompletely loaded, and the printer may
not boot up.
8. When the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and the printer has reset
itself, the process is complete.
Page | 204
Manual Two-Key Download Sequence
NOTE: This download method can be completed with firmware in the form of FILENAME.prg or
FILENAME.exe (USB Only).
The following steps prepare the printer for download. When the printer is in the download mode, any host
IO can be used to download the firmware. Serial IO is not recommended due to the size of the firmware
and the time it takes to complete. Therefore, it is not discussed in this document.
2. Connect the Ethernet cable or USB cable to the printer interface.
3. Press and hold down the LEFT SOFT KEY + RIGHT SOFT KEY on the printer’s control panel.
4. Set the printer power switch to I (On).
5. After five seconds, release the front panel keys.
6. Wait for the printer to power-up and displays “PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” on the front panel.
9. Send the firmware to the printer as described for various host IO options:
• Sending Firmware via Ethernet or Wifi (LPR)
• Sending Firmware via USB
Manual Three-Key Download Sequence

If the flash memory contains only boot code (e.g., if it is new), or if flash memory is corrupt, or you want to
delete all Flash User Files, you must download software using the manual three-key download method.
The SD card is the only method to do this:
1. Rename the FILENAME.prg to “UPGRADE” in the SD card root directory.
3. Insert the SD card into the printer.
4. Press and hold down the LEFT SOFT KEY, RIGHT SOFT KEY, and DOWN ARROW panel keys.
5. Set the printer power switch to I (On).
6. After five seconds, release the control panel keys.
7. The downloading process will begin automatically and shown on the front panel. Wait until it completes
and the printer is fully rebooted with the new firmware.
9. Remove the SD card – this completes the process.
Page | 205
Sending Firmware in Download Mode
This section describes how to send the firmware data to the printer using the desired host IO. Serial IO is
not recommended due to the size of the firmware and the time it takes to complete. Therefore, it is not
discussed in this document.
NOTE: The three-key download sequence only allows download through the SD card.
Although the program file FILENAME.prg is used in the examples, any file with a Printronix header can be
substituted in this process to download flash files.
Sending Firmware via Ethernet or Wifi (LPR)

NOTE: You will need the IP Address of the printer. This method can not be used for
FILENAME.exe. For FILENAME.exe over Ethernet or Wifi see Automatic Download section.
1. Enter the following to start the LPR program:

lpr -S xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx -P d1prn FILENAME.prg
where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP Address of the printer.

WARNING DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started. Interrupting a
download will leave the FLASH memory incompletely loaded, and the printer
may not boot up.
2. The process is complete when the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and the
printer has reset itself.
Sending Firmware via USB

This section explains how to download firmware through the USB port. This can be completed with
firmware in the form FILENAME.prg.
IMPORTANT For USB connections, the Windows Driver must be installed.
1. Install the Windows Driver from our company’s website. During the installation, make sure to share the
printer when prompted and record the “Share name”.
Figure 8 Selecting to Share the Printer
Page | 206
IMPORTANT For USB connections, the printer must have a “Share name” established.
2. The “Share name” will be needed when sending the data through the USB port. This should be
accomplished during installation, but can be verified at any time. Select the driver, right-click the
mouse button and select “Printer Properties”. Click the “Sharing” tab, make sure the “Share this
printer” box is check marked, and enter the “Share name”.
Figure 9 Setting Printer Properties Sharing Options

5. Send the file except the .exe file using the following command:
“COPY /b <File Name> \\COMP_NAME\Printers_Shared_Name” where COMP NAME is the name of
the laptop or PC and can be found in the Computer Properties screen and Printers_Shared_Name is
the shared name created above.
For FILENAME.exe use the following command:
“FILENAME –pb\\COMP_NAME\Printers_Shared_Name” where COMP NAME is the name of the
laptop or PC and can be found in the Computer Properties screen and Printers_Shared_Name is the
shared name created above. .
6. The process is complete when the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and the
printer has reset itself.
IMPORTANT DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started. Interrupting a
download will leave the flash memory on the controller PCBA and NIC
incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
Page | 207
Downloading Files to the Main File System
User Files can be downloaded into the Main File System (onboard PCB Flash) in various ways as
discussed in this section. This section does not cover specific methods used by the emulations but rather
general ways of downloading files as shown in Table 8. Font download is discussed in a later section.
Table 8. File Download Methods
File Download Method File Preparation

Web Page (Ethernet or Wifi only). User needs to know the IP address None required.
and have a browser.
Binary (raw) data of the
PTX_SETUP (any host IO). User can employ PTX_SETUP commands file is embedded within
around the file data to store the file into the Main File System. PTX_SETUP commands.
Use the PSA File Utility

Manual two-key download (any host IO). This two-key (LEFT SOFT KEY +
to create files that can
RIGHT SOFT KEY) power-up sequence puts the printer into download mode.
be loaded in download
Files can then be downloaded.
mode.
PrintNet Enterprise (Ethernet only). User may install the PrintNet For a detailed description,
Enterprise application available from our company’s website. This is the refer to the PrintNet
most versatile and powerful method to download files but requires your Ethernet User's Manual.
computer to run Java™ programs.
NOTE: Depending on the file download method, the file itself may need to be modified so that when it
is downloaded to the printer, the printer stores the file with the correct Main File System name
and file type.
Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus

Files with the one of the filename extensions below (upper or lower case) are considered system files and
are not shown in System > Flash File View or within the System > Flash File Edit > Delete Files menu.
NOTE: DO NOT download any user files with the extensions shown in Table 9.
Table 9. Filename Extensions Not Shown In Menus
Extensions
*.bin *.inf *.ras
*.cpg *.lfi *.rfv
*.eng *.map *.sec
*.fon *.pat
*.gz *.qsm
Page | 208
File Properties Not Shown in Menus
Files with one of the properties listed below (case sensitive) are considered system files and are not
shown in System > Flash File View or within the System > Flash File Edit > Delete Files menu.
NOTE: DO NOT download any user files with the one of the properties shown in Table 10.
Table 10. File Properties Not Shown In Menus
Properties
Prot NetC NGif
Rmap Rfnt Rmnu
Rprg Eprg VERS
ASIC FPGA UMCA
Rval XHEX RULE
CRft Rver Rsec
SORT
Web Page Download

1. Make sure the printer is powered up, in ONLINE mode, and the Ethernet cable is connected or Wifi is
active.
2. Obtain the IP address from the front panel ONLINE screen (or under Network in Settings ).
3. Enter the IP address of the printer in your browser (e.g., http://10.224.5.21).
4. Enter “root” for the user name when prompted, and click OK.
5. Click “Printer” in the Configuration box. The following webpage will display. Click “File Management”
to download the file.
Page | 209
Figure 10 Downloading Files using the File Management Webpage
6. Click “Browse” to navigate the directory and find the download file, then click “Download File”.
Figure 11 Navigating to Download a File
A notification displays indicating that the web page will refresh upon download completion.
Page | 210
Figure 12 File Download Notification
PTX_SETUP Download
Use PTX_SETUP to load files into the Main File System. Refer to the Appendix section entitled “Command
Format”
Example loading a font named ARIAL.TTF:
!PTX_SETUP
FILE_IO-CAPTURE;“ARIAL.TTF”
PTX_END
Arial TrueType font binary data.
NOTE: DO NOT add LF/FF to the end of the binary data.
!PTX_SETUP
FILE_IO-CAPTURE;””
PTX_END
Manual Two-Key Download

1. Download the PSA File Utility from our company’s website.
2. Use the utility to open the file to be downloaded and follow the instructions as provided in the Help
Section to create the target download file with the appropriate header that will be sent to the printer.
For example, opening the file “Arial.ttf” and creating a Download Header with type Font (as shown
above) might create a file “Arial.dwn” that will be sent to the printer in download mode.
3. Place the printer in download mode as described in
Page | 211
4. Manual Two-Key Download Sequence.
5. Send the file as described in Sending Firmware in Download Mode. Substitute Arial.dwn in place of the
firmware FILENAME.prg.
6. The process is complete when the file successfully loads into flash and the printer resets.
7. To verify that the file is recognized and downloaded, go to the System > Flash File View submenu.
One of the files displayed should (in our example) include Arial.ttf.
Downloading Files to the SD Card

SD files can be utilized by the printer and certain emulations such as PGL. Since the SD file format is an
industry standard, downloading files and fonts to the SD card does not require special facilities within the
printer. This allows the user to copy files from their PC or laptop to the SD card as well as copy printer
files on the SD card to their PC or laptop.
IMPORTANT The printer will only locate files stored on the root directory of the SD card. The
name of the file within the SD card root directory is the name shown in the SD
File System submenu.
Alternatively, users can copy files from the Main File System to the SD card by using the System > Flash
File Edit > Copy to SD menu. Users can also copy files from the SD card to the Main File System by using
the System > SD File Edit > Copy from SD menu.
PGL forms, fonts, and logos can all be read from and stored onto SD cards as described in the PGL
Programmer’s Reference Manual.
IMPORTANT The SD card must be installed at the time of power-up and cannot be removed
until the printer is powered off.
Using TrueType Fonts

TrueType fonts allow you to customize the look of your forms and labels. You can download TrueType
fonts purchased from various sources into your printer. The fonts are available for purchase on websites
such as www.fonts.com and www.myfonts.com.
The following sections discuss how to:
• Download TrueType fonts
• Select and print downloaded TrueType fonts
Uuse TrueType fonts to print DBCS using UTF-8
Downloading TrueType Fonts

You can download TrueType fonts to your printer by using any of the following methods:
• PTX_SETUP Download
• Web Page Download
• PGL Emulation other Emulations
• Manual Two-Key Download
• Labeling Applications
Once a TrueType font is downloaded, it is stored in the Main File System or SD File System as a resident
font. Regardless of printer power cycles, the downloaded font will stay in the printer until the user deletes
it. The user can find a list of all printer resident fonts within the submenus System > Flash File View or
System > SD File View. User downloaded fonts can be deleted from these same submenus. If within the
Page | 212
Main File System, the user is recommended to perform a System > Flash File Edit > Optimize & Reboot
function.
PGL Emulation
A TrueType font can be loaded by creating a file that appends a PGL command to the font and then
sending that file to the printer. Use the PGL FONTLOAD command:
~FONTLOAD;FontName;FontSize;Location
where
FontName TrueType font name, e.g. arial.ttf
FontSize TrueType font size, e.g. file size for arial.ttf
Location The download location. By default, “DISK” represents the Main File System (Flash), while
“EMC” designates the SD card. The PGL menu “Storage Select” can be changed to force
“DISK” to store fonts and other PGL elements to the SD card.
Example:
~FONTLOAD;arial.ttf;60548;DISK
(Insert binary data of arial.ttf here.)
END
After the file is created, it can be copied to the appropriate printer I/O port
while the printer is ONLINE, similar to other print files.
Example:
copy/b filename.ext lpt1 or LPT1
Manual Two-Key Download

This is described in Section “Manual Two-Key Download” on page 211.
Labeling Applications
A TrueType font can be downloaded through several labeling applications, such as Codesoft, Loftware,
and Bartender. Contact the appropriate company for more details.
Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts

After downloading the TrueType font using any of the following methods, you can access the downloaded
TrueType font by using the command as described in the PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.
To Print ASCII Characters

You can print characters from your font using the currently selected character set. You can also select a
new character set using the ISET command.
Example:
~CREATE;FORM
FONT;NAME ARIAL.TTF
ALPHA
10;10;3;3;$01234$
STOP
END
~EXECUTE;FORM;1
Page | 213
To Print All Characters
You can print all of the characters in your font using UTF-8. You must have a UTF-8 datastream to print.
Example:
~CREATE;FORM
ISET;’UTF8’
FONT;NAME ARIAL.TTF
ALPHA
10;10;3;3;$UTF-8
data$ STOP
END
~EXECUTE;FORM;1
Demo Facility
To exercise the function of a Printronix printer in an environment where there is no host computer system
available, you may need to execute a demo test file from the menu system. When executed, the demo test
file will run through the emulations as if the host computer sent the file. Once completed, it will run the file
again until terminated.
This section describes how to download, configure, execute, and terminate the demo. Demo files are
treated as other User Flash Files and therefore are preserved across downloads by default.
Downloading a Demo File

1. Download the PSA File Utility from our company’s website.
2. Use the utility to open the demo file to be downloaded and follow the instructions as provided in
the Help Section to create the target demo file with the appropriate header that will be sent to the
printer.
For example, opening the file “ean8.pgl” and creating a Download Header with type Demo (as shown
above) might create a file “ean8.dmo” that will be sent to the printer in download mode.
3. Place the printer in download mode as described in
Page | 214
4. Manual Two-Key Download Sequence.
5. Send the file as described in Sending Firmware in Download Mode. Substitute ean8.dmo in place
of the firmware FILENAME.prg.
6. The process is complete when the file successfully loads into flash and the printer resets.
7. Verify that the file is recognized and downloaded under the Tools > Print Tests > Run Tests
menu. One of the printer tests shown should include ean8.pgl.
Configuring the Printer to Run a Demo File

This facility does not attempt to identify which emulation a particular demo file is designed for. The user
must configure the printer for the appropriate emulation before invoking the demo. The demo will inherit all
menu configuration parameters when executed. The user is responsible to properly configure the forms
size, typeface, orientation, etc. This facility will not restore any configuration settings when the demo file is
finished printing.
Starting a Demo File

The demo file is initiated by selecting its Flash File name and pressing ENTER within the Tools > Print
Tests > Run Tests menu. This causes the printer to go ONLINE and print the demo file. Once the demo
file starts, it will repeat automatically until the demo file sequence is stopped.
WARNING DO NOT run a demo file if the printer is in the middle of another test or host job.
This will cause unexpected results. Similarly, do not send host jobs when
running demo tests.
Pausing a Demo File

Pause the demo by placing the printer OFFLINE (press the PAUSE key). To resume printing, go back
ONLINE.
Stopping a Demo File

Stop the demo by executing a soft reset on the printer (press the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys
simultaneously). This will resume normal operation.
Deleting a Demo File

Delete demo files similar to any other file in the Main File System. Once deleted, the file will no longer
appear as a selection in the Tools > Print Tests > Run Tests menu.
Page | 215
WLAN Radio Firmware Upgrade
There is a radio chip on the WLAN Option Board that contains firmware. This firmware is loaded into
radio chip at the factory, but there are occasions when you may have to upgrade this firmware to a newer
level.
Firmware Download Methods

The radio firmware can only be downloaded by having the radio firmware copied onto a SD card or USB
Drive renamed to UPGRADE using the Manual Two-Key Download Sequence.
IMPORTANT To upgrade the Radio firmware, the WLAN interface must be active. This means
the Ethernet cable must not be attached.
Table 11. Firmware Download Methods
Firmware Download Method File Type(s)
Manual two-key download (USB or SD Card). This two-

key (LEFT SOFT KEY + RIGHT SOFT KEY) power-up FILENAME.fls
sequence puts the printer into download mode. Radio renamed to
firmware file must be copied to the USB drive or SD card “UPGRADE”
and renamed “UPGRADE”.
The method shown above is the same procedure as downloading firmware shown earlier in this chapter.
Simply substitute FILENAME.fls for FILENAME.prg.
Page | 216
5 Diagnostics and
Troubleshooting
Printer Tests
A sequence of automatic tests is performed during printer power-up. If any faults are detected at that time,
a fault message will display.
Before placing the printer in its operating environment, run test patterns to ensure proper operation and
print quality. The printer has a number of tests which allow you to check for proper printer operation and
print quality.
You can invoke the various test patterns from the Tools > Print Tests menu. For more information, see
Tools section.
Troubleshooting Common Situations

Occasionally, situations occur that require some troubleshooting skill. Possible problem situations and
potential solutions are listed in this section. While not every conceivable situation is addressed here, you
may find some of these tips helpful. Contact a qualified service technician for problems that persist or are
not covered in this section.
Interfacing
The printer will not function properly with an incorrectly wired cable or the wrong interface cable installed.
If the cable is suspect, contact Printronix or your authorized service representative.
When the printer is first powered up, it will reset itself to the communication default parameters. The
parameters are listed in the following table:
PARAMETER DEFAULT
Baud 9600
Data Bits 8
Parity NONE
Stop Bits 1
The printer interface configuration settings may be entered from the control panel.
Hex Dump Mode

Hex dump mode allows you to place the printer into a diagnostic mode in which the printer outputs a
hexadecimal data stream on the label for examination. The purpose of hex dump mode is to see exactly
what data is received by the printer, in order to debug forms.
Page | 217
When enabled, the hex dump mode translates all host interface data to its hexadecimal equivalent, then
prints the hex code and its printable symbol, if one exists. Figure 13 shows a partial example of a hex
dump.
After the printer enters hex dump mode, all characters it prints (including any in the printer’s input buffer)
are printed in two forms: as a two-symbol hexadecimal code and as the character’s printable symbol (if it
has one). A non-printable code is printed as a period [.] symbol. Up to 16 characters can be printed per
line of hex dump printout. While the printer is in hex dump mode, it does not act upon any control codes,
other than to print their hexadecimal equivalents.
The 16 characters printed per line on the hex dump are formatted so that the 16 printable symbols are
printed in columns 1 through 16. The 17th column is blank. Column 18 contains either a p (PI line active) or
a blank (PI not active). Columns 19 and 20 contain the hexadecimal code for the first character, followed
by a blank. The PI line condition and hexadecimal code for the second character are printed in columns
22, 23, and 24, followed by a blank. The third through 16th characters are printed in a similar manner. The
hexadecimal code for the 16th character is printed in columns 78, 79, and 80.
NOTE: Values will vary based on printhead width.
Subsequent printing observes the current setting for skip-over perforation, form length, and top-of-form
position parameters.
IMPORTANT You must have a minimum of 4.1 inches of media installed and have Media
> Image > Label Width set to 4.1 inches. If not, the hex dump data will be
truncated and lost.
If a fault occurs while printing a hex dump, the printer reverts to the normal fault state. When the fault is
cleared, the printer resumes printing the hex dump (either a partial line with a form feed or nothing at all).
Top-of-Form remains unaffected.
Figure 13 Sample Hex Dump

To begin a hex dump, first place the printer OFFLINE and enable the Hex Dump Mode option from the
control panel: enable the Tools > Diagnostics > Hex Dump Mode menu.
Next, place the printer back ONLINE and send data to the printer from the host computer. Any data
received from the host is “dumped” to the printout.
To cancel a hex dump, first place the printer OFFLINE and disable the menu(s) affected. The paper may
then be advanced to the next Top-of-Form.
Controlling Print Quality

Three factors have the greatest effect on print quality:
• The amount of heat applied by the printhead (print intensity)
• The speed at which media is moving under the printhead (print speed)
• The position of printhead burn line (printhead pressure)
The life of the printhead can be adversely affected if an excessive amount of heat is needed to create the
image. For example, low-cost direct thermal media often has very high reaction temperatures, which
means that it takes a great deal of heat to make a clear image. This will shorten the life of the printhead.
Resin ribbons and film media may require higher print intensity or greater head pressure to create a high
contrast image, which may also shorten the life of the printhead.
Page | 218
The printer provides different ways to increase the heat:
• Running the printer slower by changing the print speed via the host commands or the Media >
Speed menu, allows more heat to transfer at lower print intensity settings.
• Setting the print intensity to a higher value with the Print Intensity function, accessed via host
commands or through the Media > Image menu. This causes the printhead to generate more heat
to be transferred into the media.
• The print intensity can be adjusted even higher with the Intensity Shift function, accessed through
the Media > Image menu allowing the actual setting to reach a maximum of 20. This option
should only be used if a slower speed or a higher heat setting was not successful. Using the
Intensity Shift function will shorten the available printhead life expectancy.
The position of printhead burn line will affect print quality. Please refer to section Printhead Burn Line
Adjustment to adjust printhead burn line.
Also, the printhead should be cleaned frequently to ensure that foreign material does not accumulate on
the printhead and interfere with heat transfer. If smears, voids, or white lines appear in the printed form,
the printhead should be cleaned with a printhead cleaning pen.
The cleaning should be done as a matter of routine whenever you install a new ribbon (thermal transfer
mode) or when you install new media (direct thermal mode).
Printhead
The most common signs of a worn printhead are fixed vertical streaks that are always the same size and in
the same place on the printout. To determine if vertical streaks are caused by a worn printhead, follow
these methods:
1. Clean the printhead thoroughly with the printhead cleaning pen. Test again for vertical streaks.
2. Remove the printhead (see Replacing the Printhead) and examine it for contamination or damage
such as scratches, dents, or other marks on the light brown area containing the heating elements.
Clean and install it, then test again for vertical streaks.
3. Load an alternate roll of media. Test again for vertical streaks.
4. Load an alternate roll of ribbon. Test again for vertical streaks.
If after performing all these tests you still see fixed vertical streaks, you must replace the printhead.
Page | 219
Replacing the Printhead assembly
WARNING Always unplug the printer power cord from the printer or power outlet before
doing any installation procedure. Failure to remove power could result in injury
to you and damage the equipment. When applicable, you will be instructed to
apply power.
2. Unplug the printer power cord from the printer or the AC power source.
3. Open the printer top cover by pulling the blue levers , located on each side, toward the front of the
4. Remove the ribbon and media (e.g., paper, label, or tag stock material).
CAUTION Oils from your hands can damage the light brown area (heating elements) of
the printhead. Do not touch the light brown area when you handle the printhead
assembly.
5. Touch an unpainted part of the printer frame before touching the printhead.
6. Push the one side of print head assembly then lift up to disengage it from inner cover.
Let latch to release from

top inner cover.
CAUTION To prevent electrostatic damage to electronic components, ground yourself by

touching an unpainted part of the printer frame before handling and installing
he printhead.
Page | 220
7. Disconnect the printhead cable to replace the new printhead assembly.
8. Install the right side latch of new printhead assembly first for making sure the printhead cable
assemblies into the slot as shown below.
Latch
9. Then install the left side latch of new printhead assembly to finish the printhead replacing.
Page | 221
Restore the Printer to Operation
1. Inspect the light brown area of the printhead for smudges or fingerprints. If necessary, gently
clean the light brown area with a soft, lint-free cloth (or a cotton swab) moistened with isopropyl
alcohol, or use a Cleaning Pen (P/N 203502-001).
2. Install the ribbon and media (e.g., paper, label, or tag stock material).
3. Close the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise.
4. Close the media cover.
5. Plug the AC power cord into the printer and the power source.
6. Verify the Printhead statistics from the ONLINE menu screen (the Printhead Gauge should show
100%).
7. Test printer operation and check print quality by selecting the Tools > Print Tests section and
printing one of the test patterns.
Page | 222
Solving Other Printer Problems
Table 12. Printer Problems and Solutions
Symptom Solution/Explanation
Communications Failures. 1. Check the interface cable.
2. Check the configuration to ensure the correct interface is
enabled.
3. Verify the printer is receiving data by watching for
“Receiving Data” messages in the ONLINE screen of
the control panel.
CONTROL PANEL
LCD shows ONLINE and the 1. Verify that the Active IGP Emulation shown on the
printer appears to be control panel matches the emulation data sent to the
working, but nothing is printer.
printing. 2. Verify that the SFCC selection(s) in the APPLICATION
section of the menu match the SFCC utilized within the
emulation data that is sent to the printer.
3. Verify that the labels are the correct type (direct or thermal
transfer).
4. If using direct thermal media, check that the media is
loaded with the direct thermal side facing up.
5. Check that the transfer ribbon is correctly routed. Route
transfer ribbon with ink side down as it passes under the
printhead.
6. Check that the printhead assembly is properly closed by
making sure the printhead latch is fully engaged.
7. Verify that the ribbon and media are compatible;
incompatibility can cause extremely light printing. Match
the ribbon to the type of media being used.
8. Check the used sections of ribbon for a printed image.
Often times when ribbon and media are incompatible, the
image can be seen on the ribbon but it will not transfer to
the media.
9. Check that the Print Intensity is correct. Set the Print
Intensity in the Media > Image section or via the host
software.
10. Check that the Label Width parameter value does not
exceed the width of the media installed. Set the Label
Width in Media > Image > Label Width.
11. Run the Checkerboard test print pattern from the Tools >
Print Tests menu. NOTE: Any imbalance of the print on
the page could indicated that the printhead pressure may
need adjustment.
12. Remove the printhead completely and re-install it ensuring
the cables are correctly seated.
Page | 223
LCD shows ONLINE and the This message informs the user that the printer has received
printer appears to be data, but no valid commands were found. This typically occurs
working, but nothing prints when an incorrect Active IGP Emulation or SFCC was
and “Invalid Data” displays in selected. This message will continue to display until new data
the message area. is received or when the printer is put OFFLINE.
1. If the emulation and SFCC are correct, additional
diagnostic information can be obtained by selecting the
desired option under the “xxx Diagnostics” menu, found
in the Application > Control section.
2. After selecting the desired option, run the job again to
obtain the additional diagnostic information.
ONLINE status indicator is 1. Check the LCD for a specific fault message. Press the
flashing. PAUSE key, and if a fault message displays, refer to the
LCD Message Troubleshooting table on page 232.
2. Check for an Out-of-Media condition or missing labels in
the middle of a roll. Load the correct media.
3. Check that the ribbon and label stock are correctly routed.
Load ribbon and label stock correctly.
POWER FAILURES
Printer fails to turn on, and 1. Check that the printer AC power cord is correctly attached
the display is not backlit. to the printer and to the AC power outlet.
2. Have a qualified electrician test the AC wall outlet for the
correct power range. Locate the printer in an area that has
the correct power range.
3. Check the AC power cord. Replace a damaged AC power
cord or one that you suspect may be bad.
4. Call your authorized service representative.
PRINT QUALITY
• Label(s) did not get 1. If the serial interface is being used, verify that the correct
printed within a multi label serial data protocol is selected to match the host
print job. interface protocol.
• A portion of the printed 2. If Media > Image > Clip Page = Enable, the printer may
image was clipped off have falsely detected a gap, hole, or black mark and then
and the beginning of the clipped (discarded) the remaining printable data for the
next label was printed on label. To fix this:
the same physical label. a. Perform Auto Calibrate. See Running Auto Calibrate.
b. Decrease Sensors > Control > Gap/Mark Threshold
value by 2 or 3 increments. See Gap/Mark
Threshold.
c. Set Media > Image > Clip Page to Disable and Media
> Image > Label Length to correct physical length
value. See Intro: Clip Page.
Page | 224
Media moves, but no image 1. Make sure the J402 power supply cable has a good
prints in ONLINE mode. connection to the right side of the printhead.
2. Place the printer OFFLINE and print the Checkerboard
diagnostic test pattern in Tools > Print Tests section. If the
pattern prints, there is a communication problem between
the host computer and the printer.
Media moves, but no image 1. Media is not the type for direct thermal printing. Install
prints in Direct Thermal direct thermal media.
mode. 2. Direct thermal media is installed wrong side up. Reinstall
the media with the correct side facing the printhead.
Media and ribbon move, but 1. Print the Checkerboard diagnostic test pattern and check
no image prints in Thermal that the image appears on the used portion of ribbon. If the
Transfer mode. image is on the ribbon, the ribbon may be installed with the
transfer side against the printhead, instead of against the
media.
2. The ribbon may be designed for another model printer.
3. The ribbon may not be compatible with the media.
When narrow media is Verify the Media > Image > Label Width value agrees with the
installed, the media moves width of the installed media. Too large a value will start the
but no image prints. image too far to the right and off the media.
Printing is faded or of poor 1. Clean the printhead.

quality. 2. Check that both latches on the pivoting deck are closed
and latched. Close the printhead by pressing down on
both sides of the pivoting deck and rotating the deck lock
lever fully counterclockwise.
3. Verify that the head pressure adjustment dial is properly
set. Try increasing the pressure.
4. Verify that the Print Speed and Print Intensity values are
correct. Adjust Print Speed and Print Intensity in the
Media > Speed and Media > Image sections,
respectively, or via host software.
Print is light on the left or right Check if the pressure is set for the width of the media being
side of the label. used. Even the pressure near the edge of the media.
Prints strange characters 1. If the printer serial interface is being used, check that the
instead of the correct label printer serial baud rate setting matches the baud rate of
format. the host computer. Reset the printer via software, or turn
the printer off and then on.
2. Check if the printer serial host interface is set for 8 data
bits but the transmitting device is set for 7 data bits (or
vice-versa). Check the current setting by viewing it on the
LCD, and use the Host IO > Serial section to adjust the
settings, if necessary.
Page | 225
• Start of image is printed 1. Make sure the Media > Image > Label Length value
an erroneous distance matches the actual physical length of the label installed
from the top-of-form. and the run on Auto Calibrate (see Running Auto
• The printer starts to print Calibrate on page 39).
one label and then
another, all within the These symptoms could be caused by:
same physical label.
• Severely curled labels near the end of a media roll
• Media sensor triggering off of a dark, preprinted image
on the label
• Multiple gaps within the physical label.
2. Set Media Image > Clip Page to Disable.
3. Run a Media Profile (see Running Media Profile page 40).
4. If the Media Profile printout shows that preprinted images
has an amplitude approaching the Gap/Mark Threshold
level, position the lower media sensor to avoid the image
or increase the Threshold Range percent value in the
Sensors > Calibrate section. Run Auto Calibrate again and
Media Profile to verify there is an improvement.
• Loss of one or more 1. Go to the Sensors > Calibrate section.

serialized labels within a 2. Set Gap Windowing to Enable.
print job. 3. Set Gap Length to equal the physical gap length of the
• Start of image is printed media installed. The range is 0.05 to 1.00 inches.
in the middle of the gap.
• The top part of the image The likely cause of these symptoms is that Media Image >Clip
is lost when printing with Page = Enable and a cross-perforation, radical fold or flaw in
Head First orientation the liner has caused the media sensor to detect this as the
selected. leading edge (TOF) of the new label or end of label (EOF), or
both.
Page | 226
Smears or voids in printed 1. Clean the printhead.
image. 2. Make sure the printhead temperature (Print Intensity) is
not too high. Change the Print Intensity value in the
Media > Image section.
3. Verify that the printhead burn line is setup correctly to
match the media width installed.
4. Skin oils can adhere to the surface of label stock, causing
fingerprints which inhibit thermal transfer. Wipe label stock
with a cloth, or remove a few feet of labels to expose a
clean area. Handle labels by the edges.
5. Check that the media has not been mishandled before or
during installation in the printer. Soiled media or media
with fingerprints will prevent proper ribbon transfer.
6. Check that media has not been installed inside out.
Surfaces on both sides may look identical but can produce
big differences in print quality.
7. Make sure the correct ribbon and media combination are
being used. Use the correct ribbon type.
8. Check the ribbon for creases or folds across its surface.
Smooth out the ribbon to remove any creases.
9. Reduce the Print Speed value through the Media > Speed
section, or via host software.
10. If using ribbon (Transfer Print mode), do not use direct
thermal media.
Page | 227
Advances several labels 1. Check that labels are loaded correctly.
when FEED key is pressed. 2. Check that the Media > Image > Label Length (or sent by
the host computer) agrees with the length of the media
installed. Although gaps, holes, notches, or black marks
are used to establish the Top-of-Form position, a larger
page length will override the gap and skip a page or more
if Media > Image > Clip Page is set to Disable. Set Label
Length to match the media being used.
3. Check that the printer is optimized to detect the type of
media installed. Perform Auto Calibrate for gapped and
black mark media. (See Running Auto Calibrate on
page 39)
4. Adjust the media sensor horizontally to detect gaps, holes,
notches, or narrow width black marks. (See Positioning
the Media Sensors on page 36.)
5. If the problem persists, run the Media Profile printout to
see if the label length indicators are being sensed.
6. Run Manual Calibrate. (See Running Manual Calibrate
on page 42.)
Page | 228
Label wraps around the 1. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the blue deck lock lever
platen roller. clockwise and then open the front door and loosen the two
thumbscrews for better platen access.
2. Remove the wrapped label by slowly pulling and
unwrapping it from the platen.
NOTE: Even though power is removed from the platen
motor, some drag will be felt as the platen rotates.
CAUTION
Never use a sharp object against the platen as cuts and
gouges in the platen may cause voids in the printed image
and require platen replacement.
3. When the entire label is removed from the platen, then use
an isopropyl alcohol wipe, Printronix PN 254945-901, to
remove all the adhesive from the platen to help prevent
any future label wraps. Tighten the printer front door
thumbscrews.
4. A label wrap occurs when a die cut label is incorrectly torn
at the tear bar by the user and adhesive is exposed under
the leading edge of the next label. When the printer pulls
this next label back to TOF, the adhesive contacts the
platen and when the label advances forward during
printing or a Form Feed, it wraps around the platen.
5. Label wraps can be avoided by having the user practice
careful tear off techniques and ensuring that the label
across perforations are ideally positioned at the tear bar
edge by using the correct Media > Image > Paper Feed
Shift value.
Pivoting deck is difficult to 1. Set the printhead pressure adjustment dial to the MIN
close and lock when heavy position.
tag stock media is installed. 2. Close the pivoting deck and lock the deck lock lever.
3. Position the printhead pressure adjustment dial to the
desired head pressure setting.
Print is too small or too large. Ensure the proper printhead is installed (203 or 300 dpi).
Page | 229
Print quality is good, but the 1. Make sure that the label is not formatted too close to the
printer skips every other top edge of the form. Leave white space equal to eight dot
label. rows at the top of the label. 300 dpi = .0264 inches.
An occasional blank label 203 dpi = .04 inches.
occurs within a print job, but 2. Check that Media > Image > Clip Page = Enable. Clip
no labels are lost. Page = Enable causes any printable data to be clipped off
and lost once the next TOF position (transmissive gap,
notch, hole, or reflective mark) is detected. Clip Page =
Disable allows the printer to ignore a gap or mark. The
printer looks for the gap or mark after the specified Label
Length is first reached.
RIBBON
Printer advances media, but 1. Make sure the ribbon is installed correctly.
the ribbon does not advance. 2. A poor ribbon/media combination can cause insufficient
friction between the media and ribbon. Verify that the
correct ribbon and media are being used.
3. The printhead pressure may not be set high enough. Set
the pressure higher.
4. There may be adhesive on the printhead. Clean the
printhead.
5. Verify that Media > Handling > Print Mode menu is set
for Transfer and not Direct Thermal.
Printer cuts (melts) through 1. Verify that Print Intensity is set to the proper level in the
the transfer ribbon. Media > Image section.
2. Verify that Media > Handling > Print Mode menu is set
for Transfer and not Direct Thermal.
Printing stops and the 1. Check that the media sensor is clean and undamaged.
ONLINE status indicator 2. Check that the gap between the bottom of a label and the
flashes. top of the next label is at least 0.100 inch. Use only labels
and tag stock approved for this printer.
3. Inspect for a jammed label. Remove the jammed label.
4. Check that the transfer ribbon and label stock are routed
correctly.
Page | 230
Printer Alarms
The printer has built-in alarms that monitor printer status and media stock conditions. Alarm messages
display indicating the present status of the printer and media stock levels. The alarms also indicate if the
printer electronics detect an error condition.
Fault Messages
If a fault condition occurs in the printer, the status indicator on the control panel flashes on and off and the
message display indicates the specific fault. Fault messages are summarized in Table 14.
Displayed faults fall into one of two categories:
• Operator correctable
• Field service required
Operator-Correctable Fault Messages
For the operator-correctable faults, follow the suggested corrective action under the solution section of
the table. After correcting the displayed fault, press the PAUSE key to clear the error message and status
indicator and resume printing. Some faults require the user to go ONLINE to clear. If the fault message
reappears, power off the printer and wait 15 seconds before powering on the printer again. If the error
condition persists, contact your authorized service representative.
Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention

If a fault is not correctable by the operator, the fault message is followed by an asterisk (*). This usually
indicates that an authorized service representative is needed. You should try two steps to clear the fault
before calling your authorized service representative:
1. Set the printer power switch to O (off), wait 15 seconds, then turn the printer on again. Run your
print job again. If the message does not appear, it was a false indication and no further attention
is required.
2. If the message reappears, press the PAUSE key. If the message goes away, it was a false
indication and no further attention is required. If the message reappears, call your authorized
service representative.
Fatal Messages Requiring Firmware Upgrade or Diagnostics

Some faults are generated by the software when a fatal error occurs that is not recoverable. These faults
are prefixed with “Fatal Error:” and are the result of a software algorithm failure. When these faults occur,
the following steps are recommended:
1. Cycle Power. Run the print job again. If the message appears, load the latest firmware.
2. Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears, record the display message and follow
the instructions for 錯誤! 找不到參照來源。.
3. Contact your authorized customer service representative.
Page | 231
Table 13. LCD Message Troubleshooting
Displayed Message Solution/Explanation
BAD VFU CHANNEL The application tried to use an undefined VFU channel.
1. Change the application to use defined channels.
BUFFER OVERFLOW Host sent data after the printer buffer was full (serial interface).
1. Verify that the printer matches the host serial interface

configuration settings for Data Protocol, Baud Rate, Data Bits,
Stop Bits, Parity, Data Terminal Ready, and Request to
Send.
2. Set printer serial interface parameters to match those of the
host.
BUFFER OVERRUN Receive overrun (serial interface).
1. Verify that the printer matches the host serial interface

configuration settings for Data Protocol, Baud Rate, Data Bits,
Stop Bits, Parity, Data Terminal Ready, and Request to
Send.
2. Set printer serial interface parameters to match those of the
host.
CALIBRATION FAIL Calibration values derived from Manual Calibrate were not
acceptable.
1. Run Manual Calibrate again.
CANNOT CALIBRATE Calibrate was attempted with Peel-Off Media Handling selected.
Disable Peel-Off NOTE: You can perform Auto Calibrate in Peel-Off mode if
Cal in Peel Mode = Enable. Be prepared to catch labels during
Auto Calibrate.
1. Select another option in the Media > Handling > Media

Handling menu.
2. Enable Sensors > Calibrate > Cal in Peel Mode.
CHECKSUM ERROR The printer received the complete program but the checksum did
FLUSHING QUEUES not match. The data may have been corrupted during download.
1. Power off the printer for 15 seconds, then power back on.
2. If the problem persists, contact your authorized customer
Page | 232
CUTTER FAULT • Cutter assembly is not in the closed position.

Jam or Cut Fail • Cutter option was not able to complete a full cut cycle due to a
jam.
• Cutter PCBA detected current overload and opened circuit
breaker on cutter PCBA.
1. Place the cutter assembly in the closed (up) position.
2. Clear obstruction from the cutter assembly.
3. Ensure media thickness is within specification.
4. Wait a few minutes for the cutter circuit breaker to
automatically reset.
5. Press PAUSE to clear the fault message and resume
Diagnostic Entry: Diagnostic mode was entered from a special key sequence or
Power-up Key Request the debugger.
Debugger CD Command No action required.
Debugger HALT Command
DIRECT THERMAL This is the normal reminder message when you change the
Remove Ribbon Media > Handling > Print Mode setting from Transfer to Direct.
1. Remove ribbon from the ribbon supply and ribbon take-up
spindles in the printer.
2. If ribbon is required for printing, change the Print Mode back
to Transfer.
ERROR: DC PROGRAM The printer cannot find the data controller program or the
NOT VALID validation checksum is corrupt.
1. Power off the printer for 15 seconds, then power back on.
2. Download the emulation software again.
ERROR: PROGRAM NOT The printer is not compatible with the downloaded program.
COMPATIBLE 1. Power off the printer for 15 seconds, then power back on.
Page | 233
ERROR: PROGRAM NOT The printer does not see a program in flash memory.
VALID 1. Power off the printer for 15 seconds, then power back on.
ERROR OCCURRED An interim message displays while the printer discards host data
FLUSHING QUEUES it cannot use because a fault condition exists. While this
message displays, the asterisk (*) rotates.
Wait. When the asterisk (*) stops rotating, a different fault
message will appear; troubleshoot the final message. Contact
your authorized customer service representative
FATAL ERROR A fatal software error has occurred.
xxxx 1. Cycle Power. Run the print job again. If the message appears,
load the latest firmware.
2. Run the print job again. If the message appears, record the
display message and follow the instructions for 錯誤! 找不到
參照來源。.
3. Contact your authorized customer service representative.
FILE EXISTS The printer operator tried to save a file using the name of an
Enable Overwrite existing stored file.
1. Enter the System > Flash File Edit menu and enable the
Overwrite Files feature to overwrite the existing file.
FILE SYS FULL Insufficient flash memory available to store file. Given there is
Delete Files 128MB of Flash Memory, this error is still possible but unlikely.
1. Go to the System > Flash File Edit section of the menu.
2. Check the amount of flash memory that can be optimized
from the “Flash Reclaimable” menu.
3. If this value is small, then use “Delete Files” to delete
unwanted files.
4. If this value is large, then run “Optimize & Reboot”.
FILE SYS FULL File system not detected or flash was corrupted.
Optimize&Reboot 1. Run the System > Flash File Edit > Optimize & Reboot
feature.
FILE SYS INVALID The file system was given an invalid request.
Optimize&Reboot 1. Run the System > Flash File Edit > Optimize & Reboot
feature.
Page | 234
FILE SYS WRITE Problem writing to flash memory.

Check Flash 1. Power off the printer for 15 seconds, then power back on. If
the problem persists, contact your authorized customer
FILE UPLOADING File is uploading to PNE.
Please Wait 1. Wait for upload completion before accessing printer front
panel.
FRAMING ERROR Serial framing error over a serial interface.
1. Match the serial interface settings of the printer to those of the
host computer.
GAP NOT DETECTED • The printer is set for Gap or Mark sensing, but a gap, notch, or
black mark is not being detected.
• The lower media sensor is not positioned correctly.
• Gap/Mark Threshold is set too high or Paper Out Threshold is
set too low.
1. Check that the setting of the Gap/Mark Sensor in the
SESNOR > Control section matches the installed media.
2. Check the position of the lower and upper media sensors.
(See Positioning the Media Sensors on page 36.)
3. Clean the sensor assembly and paper path.
4. Run Auto Calibrate to improve the sensor’s ability to detect the
media in use.
5. Run the Sensors > Diagnostic > Media Profile.
6. Run Manual Calibrate. (See Running Manual Calibrate
page 42.)
7. Manually change the Gap/ Mark Threshold and/or Paper
Out Threshold values.
Half Speed Mode The printhead or power supply is approaching a hot state. Half
Speed Mode helps the cooling process and should permit
completion of print jobs. Half Speed Mode helps prevent a PRINT
HEAD HOT or PWR SUPPLY HOT fault, which will stop the
printer.
1. Allow printer to continue printing. Full speed will resume
automatically when a lower printhead or power supply
temperature is achieved.
2. Let the printer cool down. Full speed will be restored when
printing is resumed.
3. Lower Media > Image > Print Intensity and Media > Speed >
Print Speed to reduce frequency of Half Speed Mode.
Page | 235
HEAD POWER FAIL Printhead lost power.

1. Replace the printhead.
2. Power off the printer for 15 seconds, then power back on
again.
IGP/PGL ERROR Appears when the “Fault” option is selected from Error Report in
the front panel and there is an application programming error with
the IGP emulation PGL.
1. Correct the application programming error as described in the
PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.
2. The other option is to modify Application > PGL Setup >
Error Report menu.
INCOMPATIBLE WITH Peel-Off Media Handling selection was attempted with the cutter
CUTTER option still installed. These modes require that the Peel option be
installed to use the Label Taken Sensor.
1. Select a different Media Handling Mode.
2. Power off the printer and remove the cutter option, install
the Peel option, power on the printer and select Peel-Off
Mode.
LABEL MISSING The Label Taken Sensor did not detect the label present over the
Check Paper Path tear bar with Peel-Off Media Handling mode enabled.
• The label was removed before the printer stopped printing or
before the LCD “Remove Label” message displayed.
• The label slipped behind the platen roller.
• The label wrapped around the platen roller.
• Peel-Off Media Handling mode was mistakenly selected.
1. Press the PAUSE key to continue printing and then wait for
the LCD “Remove Label” message before removing the label.
2. Open the pivoting deck, reinstall the label, close the deck,
press the PAUSE key, and continue printing.
3. Open the pivoting deck and remove wrapped labels from the
platen. Clean all adhesive from the platen. Reinstall labels,
close the deck, press the PAUSE key, and continue printing.
4. Select the correct Media Handling mode in the Media >
Handling section.
Page | 236
OPTION NOT INSTALLED If the printer is powered on with the cutter enabled in Media >
Handling > Media Handling, but the cutter itself is open (in the
down position, or the cutter upper enclosure is removed) the
printer cannot detect the cutter. When using the cutter, the printer
must be powered on with the cutter in the up position and the
cutter upper enclosure installed.
1. Check that the cutter option is installed, connected in the up

position, and the upper enclosure installed before powering
on the printer.
2. Install the cutter option or change to the correct option in the
Media > Handling > Media Handling menu.
3. If the error persists, contact your authorized customer service
representative.
… OR …
If the printer is powered on in Peel-Off in Media > Handling >
Media Handling, but the Peel option cannot be detected by the
printer. When using Peel-Off handling, the printer must be
powered on with the Peel option installed.
1. Check that the Peel option is installed and connected before

powering on the printer.
2. Install the Peel option or change to the correct option in the
Media > Handling > Media Handling menu.
If the error persists, contact your authorized customer service
representative.
Page | 237
PAPER OUT The printer does not sense media:

Load Paper • Media was not installed or has run out.
• A break in media has occurred.
• Media was not routed or installed correctly.
• The media sensor is not positioned correctly.
• Media is installed correctly, but the sensor is not detecting it.
• Sensors > Control > Gap/Mark Thresh value may be set too
high and/or Sensors > Control > Paper Out Thresh may be set
too low.
• The printer detected a false PAPER OUT when changing to
Gap or Mark sensing or vice-v ersa.
1. Install media. If a break occurred, reinstall the media. Press

the PAUSE key to clear the fault message.
2. Verify the lower media sensor is properly positioned under the
media. Run Auto Calibrate to improve the ability of the sensor
to detect the installed media.
3. Check if the Gap/Mark Threshold is too high or the Paper Out
Threshold is too low. Lower the Gap/Mark Threshold or raise
the Paper Out Threshold value.
4. If using media with no gaps or black marks, perform Auto
Calibrate to establish a valid Paper Out Threshold.
5. If the printer detected a false PAPER OUT when changing to
Gap or Mark sensing or vice-versa, press the PAUSE key and
run Auto Calibrate.
PARITY ERROR Parity error (serial interface).

1. Check your serial host interface parameter settings. If
necessary, change them so they match the settings of the
attached host.
POWER SAVER MODE This is a status message. The printer is in low-energy idle state,
the higher voltages are off, and only +5Vdc logic circuits are
active.
No action required.
PRINT HEAD COLD Printer is in a cold environment or the printhead data cable has
become dislodged from the back of the printhead or the controller.
1. Reseat the cables on printhead.
2. Change the printhead.
3. Place printer in a warmer location.
4. If problem persists, contact your authorized service
representative.
Page | 238
PRINT HEAD HOT The printhead has become overheated.

1. Allow the printhead to cool down for 5 minutes, then press
PAUSE. Resume printing.
2. If possible, reduce print intensity.
3. If problem persists, contact your authorized service
representative.
PRINT HEAD UP Printhead is not closed and completely latched.
Close Print Head 1. Close and latch the printhead pivoting deck.
PRINTER HOT The printer has detected higher than usual temperatures on the
controller PCBA.
1. Power off the printer for 15 seconds, then power the printer
back on.
2. Move the printer to a cooler location.
3. If the problem persists after moving the printer to a
cooler location, contact your authorized customer
PRINTER UNDER Indicates that PNE has control of the printer.

REMOTE CONTROL 1. Press any key on the printer.
Remove Label • A label was detected at the front of the printer by the Label
Taken Sensor. This is the normal reminder message when
Peel-Off Media Handling has been selected.
• A label was removed, but the “Remove Label” message
remained.
• The incorrect Media Handling mode was selected.
1. Remove the label from the front of the printer to allow the next
label to print.
2. Verify that a front door assembly is installed on the printer and
that it is properly closed. Ensure that no debris is obstructing
the door mirror or the Label Taken Sensor.
3. Change Media > Handling > Media Handling to the correct
selection.
Replace printhead for The printhead has reached the end of the warranty life.
optimal print quality
Page | 239
Ribbon Low • The supply spool is getting low.

• If there is a large amount of ribbon still on the supply spool,
then the Ribbon Low message is being displayed falsely.
1. Replace ribbon.
2. Disable Media > Ribbon > Ribbon Low.
RIBBON OUT The ribbon supply spool is empty or the ribbon has broken.
Load Ribbon 1. Replace ribbon.
2. Reinstall ribbon.
SECURITY VIOLATION # The software being used is not correct for the printer.
1. Load the correct software.
NOTE:
# represents source of the error where:
1 = Failure during 3 button download
2 = Failure during 2 button download
3 = Failure during power up
Hex Dump Mode

As an aid to troubleshooting, the Hex dump mode allows you to place the printer into a diagnostic mode in
which the printer outputs a hexadecimal data stream on the label for examination. The purpose of hex
dump mode is to see exactly what data is received by the printer, in order to debug forms.
When enabled, the hex dump mode translates all host interface data to its hexadecimal equivalent, then
prints the hex code and its printable symbol, if one exists. Figure 13 shows a partial example of a hex
dump.
Figure 14 Sample Hex Dump

After the printer enters hex dump mode, all characters it prints (including any in the printer’s input buffer)
are printed in two forms: as a two-symbol hexadecimal code and as the character’s printable symbol (if it
has one). A non-printable code is printed as a period [.] symbol. Up to 16 characters can be printed per
line of hex dump printout. While the printer is in hex dump mode, it does not act upon any control codes,
other than to print their hexadecimal equivalents.
Page | 240
The 16 characters printed per line on the hex dump are formatted so that the 16 printable symbols are
printed in columns 1 through 16. The 17th column is blank. Column 18 contains either a p (PI line active) or
a blank (PI not active). Columns 19 and 20 contain the hexadecimal code for the first character, followed
by a blank. The PI line condition and hexadecimal code for the second character are printed in columns
22, 23, and 24, followed by a blank. The third through 16th characters are printed in a similar manner. The
hexadecimal code for the 16th character is printed in columns 78, 79, and 80.
NOTE: Values will vary based on printhead width.
Subsequent printing observes the current setting for skip-over perforation, form length, and top-of-form
position parameters.
IMPORTANT You must have a minimum of 4.1 inches of media installed and have Media
> Image > Label Width set to 4.1 inches. If not, the hex dump data will be
truncated and lost.
If a fault occurs while printing a hex dump, the printer reverts to the normal fault state. When the fault is
cleared, the printer resumes printing the hex dump (either a partial line with a form feed or nothing at all).
Top-of-Form remains unaffected.
To begin a hex dump, first place the printer OFFLINE and enable the Hex Dump Mode option from the
control panel: enable the Tools > Diagnostics > Hex Dump Mode menu.
Next, place the printer back ONLINE and send data to the printer from the host computer. Any data
received from the host is “dumped” to the printout.
To cancel a hex dump, first place the printer OFFLINE and disable the menu(s) affected. The paper may
then be advanced to the next Top-of-Form.
Diagnostics for Fatal Error

If the printer stalls with an LCD message that starts with “Fatal Error:”, reboot the printer and continue. If
this situation persists, invoke the diagnostic Auto Dump that will capture the failure dump in a flash file
that can be later uploaded from PrintNet Enterprise Suite or SD memory card and sent to Printronix
Customer Support Center (see Printronix Customer Support Center) for further analysis.
This diagnostic option must be enabled for the printer to capture the information. To perform this
diagnostic do the following the procedure:
1. Enable the Tools > Advanced > Auto Dump option.
2. When the failure happens, reboot the printer and wait for it to power up again.
3. Under System > Flash File View, check to see if files ‘AUTODP*.LOG ‘ are present.
4. If present, use PrintNet Enterprise Suite to upload these files to your host computer. Alternatively, use
the function System > Flash File Edit > Copy to SD to copy the file onto an SD memory card. Or use
System > USB File Edit > Copy to USB to copy the file onto a USB drive.
5. Contact Printronix Customer Support Center and send them the files and the printer’s configuration
printout. Refer to the PrintNet Enterprise Suite User’s Manual for instructions to accomplish these
tasks.
Page | 241
A Specifications
Print Method
Table 14. Printing Specifications
T820 T830
Print Resolution (dpi) 203 300

.005 .0033
Min. Dot Size (sq. in)
(.127 mm) (.083 mm)
Bar Code Modulus (mils)
Picket Fence 5 - 127 3.3 - 110
Ladder 10 -127 10 - 110
Max. Print Speed (ips) 8
Max. Slew Speed (ips) 8

4.1
Max. Print Width
104.1 mm
0.25 ~ 50”
Print Length
6.3 ~ 1270 mm
Page | 242
Media Handling
Maximum Max Print Limitations

Width Speed
Label
Tear-off 4.4 in 8 ips -
Not compatible with

Peel 4.4 in 3 ips nom
RFID
Not compatible with

Cutter 4.4 in 4 ips nom
RFID
Media
Table 15. Media - General Information
Type Roll-fed, die-cut continuous or fanfold labels, tags or tickets;

most direct thermal or thermal transfer materials.
Supply Roll 5 inch (127 mm) maximum diameter on 1 inch (25.4 mm) to 1-
1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter cores.
Label Material Thermal transfer plain-coated papers, vinyl, Mylar, metallized

paper, non-woven fabric, fine woven fabric, thermal-visible light
scannable paper, infrared scannable paper, thermal ticket/tag
stock, thermally-sensitive plastic stock.
Media Sensing Mark sensor horizontally moveable sensor. Gap sensor fixed
position centerline of printer. When set to Mark, it senses a black
mark on the underside of tag or label stock, or notch on side.
Gap sensor recognizes the inter-label gap by shining light through
the linter. When set to Disable, it senses no label indicators or
ignores all existing label length indicators on the installed
Label Peel-Off Peels and presents label to the operator, one at a time.
Label Taken Sensor (part Detects when a printed label is at the printer exit throat. Used
of the Peel Option) only for Peel-Off Media Handling mode.
Page | 243
I. Tag Specification II. Tag Specification III. Label Specification
(Mark Sensing) (Gap Sensing) (Gap Sensing)
Black Mark (on underside)
Direction of Media Motion Direction of Media Motion Direction of Media Motion
Figure 15 Media Dimensions

Table 16. Media Specifications
T820 T830
A Label Width Range 0.79 -4.4 in.

20mm to 112mm
B Backing Width Range 0.79 -4.4 in.

20mm to 112mm
C Min. Gap/Hole/Notch Height 0.10 in.

2.54 mm
K Min. Refl. Mark Height 0.10 in.

2.54 mm
I Min Refl. Mark Width 0.5 in.

12.7 mm
E Media Thickness Range 0.00236 -0.00748 in.
0.06 -0.19 mm
G Width of Inter-label gap/hole 0.25-0.50 in.

6.35-12.7 mm
Page | 244
Table 16. Media Specifications
T820 T830
D Media Length Range

Continuous/Batch Mode1 0.25 in. (6.35mm) – 50 in. (1270mm)
Tear-Off Strip Mode1
0.25 in. (6.35mm) – 50 in. (1270mm)
Peel-Off Mode 1 in. minimum (25.4 mm) – 50 in. (1270 mm) 2
Cut Mode 1 in. minimum (25.4 mm) – 50 in. (1270 mm)
These figures are approximate and depend upon the active emulation and application.
(1)
Media length must be greater than 1.96” (49.8mm) for tear function.
(2)
1.5 inch with Validator support.
Ribbon
Table 17. Ribbon Specifications
T820 T830
1.0 -4.4 in. 1.0 -4.4 in.

Ribbon Width Range
25.4 -112 mm 25.4 -112 mm
Max. Ribbon Length 300m 300m
Max Ribbon Roll 2.68 in 2.68 in

Diameter 68mm 68mm
Indicators and Switches
Table 18. Indicators and Switches
Indicator Lights: ONLINE
Switches: POWER
Keys: PAUSE, F E E D , LEFT SOFT KEY, RIGHT

SOFT KEY, UP / DOWN / LEFT / RIGHT
ARROW KEYS, ↵ (ENTER)
Message Display: 320 x 240 Color QVGA display
Page | 245
Memory
Table 19. Memory Specifications
Flash Memory (standard) 128 MB soldered onto Controller PCBA
DRAM (standard) 128 MB soldered onto Controller PCBA
Media Cutter Option

Cutters are designed to cut tags and label liner. Avoid cutting through the adhesive backed portion of any
media.
Cutting through perforate liner is not recommended. In addition, although the cutter may operate with
synthetic, foil, and woven materials, application testing is encouraged to ensure reliable operation and to
assess cutter life.
Table 20. Cutter Specification
Typical Life > 1,000,000 cuts
Warranty** 12 months or 500,000 cuts

(whichever comes first)
Environment Same specifications as printer
Cutting Method Slide type
Media Thickness Range 0.06~0.28mm (0.00236~0.0011in)

Media Width Range 15~110mm (0.6~4.33in)
Media Length Range 25.4~1270mm (1.00~50 in.)
Allowable Cutting Frequency Max. 25 cuts per minute

(cutting 0.06mm media)
** Warranty is based on cutting label liner and paper based tag stock only. All other materials (including
synthetic, foil, and woven materials) may reduce cutter life to an indeterminate amount, even when they
are within the rated media thickness specification. Qualification and life-testing is recommended for these
cutter applications.
Page | 246
Host Interfaces
Table 21. Host Interface Characteristics
1. RS-232 at 600,1200,2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600, or 115200 baud.

2. USB 2.0
3. Ethernet 10/100
4. Wireless 802.11 a/b/g/n
The RS-232 host interfaces shall have the following characteristics:
Word Length: Selectable 7-bit or 8-bit data format
Handshaking: XON/XOFF (in receive mode only) and

CTS/RTS
Input Buffer: Selectable from 1k through 16 kbytes. XOFF

is transmitted and RTS goes low when
buffer is equal to or less than 25% of full.
XON is transmitted and RTS goes high
when buffer is 25% above empty.
Characters are transmitted with no parity
from the printer
Power
Table 22. Power Source and Grounding
Power Source: 115 or 230 VAC 50/60Hz switching

power supply.
Grounding: Unit must be connected to a properly
grounded receptacle.
Table 23. Power Consumption
203 dpi, 14 ips 300 dpi, 12 ips

Energy Power Saver Mode 1.9 Watts 1.9 Watts
Standby 5.4 Watts 5.4 Watts
25% Print Density 90 Watts 90 Watts
T800 in Thermal Transfer Print Mode, +15 Intensity, 22degC @ 40% RH
Page | 247
Environmental
Table 24. Environmental Information
Operating Temperature: 41° F to 104° F (5° C to 40° C)
Storage Temperature: -40° F to 150° F (-40° C to 60° C)
Operating Humidity: 20% to 85%, non-condensing

Storage Humidity: 5% to 85% non-condensing
Ventilation: Free air movement

Dust: Non-conducting, non-corrosive
Noise <66dB(a)
Physical
Table 25. Physical Dimensions
T820, T830
Outside Dimensions 1.5 in H x 8.6 in W x 11.2 in D
119mm H x 219mm W x 285mm D
Weight 6lbs
2.75kg
NOTE:
Media Cutter: Add 1.4 in Depth
Acoustic Specifications
Table 26. Acoustic Noise Levels per ISO 9296
T820, T830
Printing @ 6 IPS 66 dBA
Standby Same as Ambient
Page | 248
B Printer Options
Media Handling Accessories and Options are offered with the printer to enhance its capabilities and to
provide a large degree of application flexibility. A description of the option complement is given below.
Field-installable options include installation instructions.
Media Handling Accessories

Media Cutter
The printer may be ordered with a cutter mechanism installed (for cutting tags and label liner), or the option
can be installed by an authorized service representative at a later date. Once installed, the printer can be
configured to automatically cut media after each or a specified number of labels is printed.
Peel Dispenser
Peels off labels one at a time before printing the next label. Peel-off is available as a factory option or field
installable kit.
Hardware Options
RFID
This option provides the capability of programming EPC Global Gen2 RFID tags during the printing
process.
The printer may be ordered with the RFID reader installed.
Interface Options
Wireless NIC (802.11 a/b/g/n/ac/b/g/n wireless)
The Wireless NIC provides 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac/b/g/n connectivity. The card provides wireless connectivity
without expensive cabling and reconfigurations required from a wired network. PNE (standard with the
wireless NIC), is a printer management tool.
The printer may be ordered with the wireless option installed.
Bluetooth 4.2
The BT 4.2 adapter provides wireless communications protocol designed for low power usage, within a
short range.
The printer may be ordered with the Bluetooth option installed.
Page | 249
Software Options
Premium Asian Fonts
A selection of three different purchasable Asian fonts can be provided (one font per SD card). These Asian
fonts include Hanzi GB, Kanji SJIS, and Hangul, are available for use when the SD card is installed.
Quick Change Memory Cartridge

The QCMC provides the ability to duplicate an entire printer’s firmware, saved configurations, and custom
files quickly through the printer’s control panel with a user friendly interface.
Supplies
The best printing solution is achieved when the printer, ribbon, and media are matched to the application
requirements. The use of Genuine Printronix Thermal Media and Ribbons will ensure optimum image
quality, consistent bar code performance, and extended life of the printhead.
For any other questions concerning Genuine Printronix Thermal Supplies, please visit our company’s
website or email to the following entities:
Americas: Service@PrintronixAutoID.com
Europe, Middle East, Africa: EMEA_support@PrintronixAutoID.com

Asia: APAC_support@PrintronixAutoID.com
China: CHINA_support@PrintronixAutoID.com
Manuals
The most recent edition of our manuals are available from our company’s website.
• Maintenance Manual
• LP+ Programmer’s Reference Manual
• PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual
• VGL Programmer’s Reference Manual
• TGL Programmer’s Reference Manual
• IGL Programmer’s Reference Manual
• STGL Programmer’s Reference Manual
• DGL Programmer’s Reference Manual
• IEGL Programmer’s Reference Manual
• MGL Programmer’s Reference Manual
• EGL Programmer’s Reference Manual
• RFID Labeling Reference Manual
• Network Interface Card User’s Manual
• PrintNet Enterprise Suite User’s Manual
Page | 250
C Media Cutter Installation
Printer Media Cutter Installation

Preparing the Printer
2. Open the printer to remove the front cover as shown.
Installing the Media Cutter

WARNING The cutter blades are sharp. Keep your fingers away from the cutter blades.
3. Put the cutter cable connector through the opening of the lower inner cover front side.
Cutter Cable
Cutter Assembly Connector
Page | 251
4. Gently place the cutter assembly into niches on both sides of the lower inner cover, then push the
cutter to lock into the lower inner cover. Make sure the cutter cable is fed into the opening.
5. Turn the printer upside down. Unscrew one screw on the printer bottom cover.
Page | 252
6. Open the cover to plug the cutter assembly connector into the printer main board receptacle.
Note: There is the RTC battery cable on the bottom cover, please open the cover carefully.
Page | 253
D Peel-off Module Installation
Printer Peel-off Module Installation

Preparing the Printer
2. Open the printer to remove the front cover as shown.
Installing the Peel-off Module
3. Put the peel-off module cable connector through the opening of the lower inner cover front side.
Peel-off Module
Cable Connector
Peel-off Module
Page | 254
4. Gently place the peel-off module into the niches on both sides of the lower inner cover, then push it to
lock into the lower inner cover. Make sure the cable is fed into the opening.
Page | 255
5. Turn the printer upside down. Unscrew one screw on the printer bottom cover.
6. Open the cover to plug the peel-off module connector into the printer main board receptacle.
Note: There is the RTC battery cable on the bottom cover, please open the cover carefully.
Page | 256
E Loading WLAN Certificates
Overview
This section describes how to load the certificate(s) for both the WLAN Extensible Authentication Protocol
(EAP) and SOTI Connect https://www.soti.net/products/soti-connect/ using the PSA File Utility. The
PSA File Utility will take certificate files (generated by the System Administrator) and combine them with
the PTX_SETUP commands such that a single output file can be sent to the printer and effectively load
the certificates.
IMPORTANT For the certificates to work correctly, the Real Time Clock (RTC) must be set
properly. This can be done using the menus in System > Date.
WiFi Certificates
There are two options that can be selected for EAP mode that determines whether one or three files is
needed. For EAP-TLS, the printer requires three files:
• Certificate Authority (CA) File
• Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) Certificate File
• Key File
For EAP-PEAP, only the Certificate Authority File is required. These files should originate from your
System Administrator.
NOTE: WLAN Certificates can only be loaded if the WLAN Option is installed in the printer.
SOTI Certificates
There are 4 different certificate files that can be downloaded to the printer to support SOTI connection:
• MQTT Certification File
• File Store File
• Printer Certification File
• Private Key File
One or more of these files can be provided to create a single file that loads them into the printer.
802.1x Certificates
There are 3 different certificate files that can be downloaded to the printer to support the 802.1x
connection:
• Certificate Authority (CA) File
• Printer Certification File
• Private Key File
One or more of these files can be provided to create a single file that loads them into the printer.
Page | 257
WiFi Certificates
Windows Procedure
Download the PSA File Utility available from our company’s website. Run the application then execute the
WiFi Certificate Load section as follows, choosing either EAP-PEAP or EAP-TLS.
This will bring up a Dialog with either one or three files needed as input:
You can either double-click in the file boxes or click on the button to enter the file
names for each type of security file.
Once every required file has been entered, the Create button can be pushed and the user will be prompted
to choose an output file.
Once the output file is created, this output file can then be sent to the printer like any other host application
job while the printer is online. No need to put the printer in download mode.
Linux Procedure
1. Download the WLAN Certificate Utility from our company’s website.
Page | 258
2. Unzip the file and you will find a Linux version (bdcert.lnx), Windows version (bdcert.bat), and
README.TXT file.
3. The bdcert.lnx must be run from a Linux command line.
4. Usage of the bdcert.lnx is as follows:
When all three certificate files are required:
bdcert.lnx (ca file) (pem file) (key file) > (ptx file)
When only the certificate authority file is required:
bdcert.lnx (ca file) > (ptx file)
5. Run bdcert.lnx with the certificate authority filename, the certificate filename, and the private key
filename redirecting the output to an output file or Run bdcert.lnx with the certificate authority
filename redirecting the output to an output file.
6. Once the output file has been generated it can be sent to the printer through any host interface while
the Printer is Online.
Webpage Procedure
NOTE: Certificates can be loaded using the Ethernet or WLAN interface.
1. Make sure the printer is powered up, in ONLINE mode, and that the Ethernet cable is connected or
the printer is connected through the WLAN.
2. Get the IP address from the front panel ONLINE screen (or under Network in Settings ).
3. Enter the printer’s IP address in your browser (e.g., http://10.224.5.21).
4. When prompted for a user name and password, enter “root” for user name and click OK.
5. Click “Network” in the Configuration box.
6. In the Certificates and Security Key box browse for the certificate files.
7. Enter the Certificate file in the PEM slot.

8. Enter the Certificate Authority file in the CA slot.
9. Enter the Private Key file in the Key Slot.
Page | 259
10. Click on the Upload button for each of the files
11. After each file is uploaded a Notification message is displayed.
12. Click on OK to continue to the next file.

13. After all the files have been uploaded a notification message is displayed.
After the Web Page redisplays the Certificates are loaded and ready to use.
Page | 260
SOTI Certificates: Create the Download File
Download the PSA File Utility available from our company’s website. Run the application then execute the
SOTI Certificate Load section as follows.
This will bring up a Dialog with four optional files that can be chosen as input:
You can either double-click in the file boxes or click on the button to enter the
file names for each type of security file.
Once at least one file has been entered, the Create button can be pushed and the user will be prompted
to choose an output file. Ideally, all four files would be entered before doing the Create action.
Once the output file has been generated, it can be sent to the printer as any other application or host job
while the printer is online.
Page | 261
802.1x Certificates: Create the Download File
Run the PSA File Utility and then execute the 802.1x Certificate Load section as follows.
This will bring up a Dialog with three optional files that can be chosen as input:
You can either double-click in the file boxes or click on the button to enter the
file names for each type of security file.
Once at least one file has been entered, the Create button can be pushed and the user will be prompted
to choose an output file. Ideally, all four files would be entered before doing the Create action.
Page | 262
F PTX_SETUP Commands
Overview
The PTX_SETUP commands are a superset of commands which allow the printer to perform several
tasks by parsing commands either stored in flash or sent to the printer by the host. Commands range from
re-routing debug statements to downloading complete printer configurations.
This appendix describes the PTX_SETUP commands specific to thermal printers, as well as the
commands which are not platform specific.
Command Format
Some concepts to keep in mind are as follows:
1. PTX_SETUP commands are not emulation specific. In a system with IGP emulations, the IGP level
emulation will process the PTX_SETUP commands. In a system without an IGP, the PTX_SETUP
commands will be processed by the base emulation (e.g., LP+).
2. Since there is no disk on a flash-based printer, DISK_IO commands are now called FILE_IO.
However, for backwards compatibility DISK_IO and FILE_IO are synonymous.
3. The PTX_SETUP command set is case sensitive; all PTX_SETUP commands are in upper case
characters only.
4. The white space separating commands may be any number of spaces and tabs. This allows a
PTX_SETUP file to be formatted for easier readability.
5. The PTX_SETUP and PTX_END command should be followed by a new line character.
6. Any unknown command will terminate the PTX_SETUP processing. The offending command will be
the first line of printed text.
7. Although the original implementation of PTX_SETUP allowed for only a single parameter, separated
from the sub-command by a single semicolon (;) character, the new PTX_SETUP command set
allows for multiple parameters separated by commas, semicolons, spaces or tabs.
Each emulation has modes in which the PTX_SETUP commands could get missed. For example, when a
PGL label is being defined using the ~CREATE … END sequence, PTX_SETUP commands will not be
processed during label format definition.
Therefore, it is highly recommended that all PTX_SETUP commands be placed between print jobs, rather
than attempting to embed them within jobs.
PTX_SETUP commands have the following format:

(SFCC)PTX_SETUP
Command–Action;Parameter
PTX_END
For example, if the SFCC assigned to PTX_SETUP is the default value of the exclamation mark (!, hex
21), and you wanted to load configuration number 4, you would use the following command:
!PTX_SETUP
Page | 263
CONFIG–LOAD;4
PTX_END
This Appendix Section will be divided into different PTX_SETUP groups based on the Command. Each
section will show different Actions and Parameters with a brief description of each. Some Commands may not be
available for every product as they are often related to a particular option or capability. This will be noted in the
Section.
NOTE: When a file system error occurs, a message will be displayed on the front panel indicating the
error, and the action needed to take to correct the error.
CONFIG Commands
!PTX_SETUP
CONFIG–Action;Parameter
PTX_END
Table 27. PTX_SETUP CONFIG Commands
Action Parameter Description
This command resets all of the configuration names to their

CLEAR_NAMES
default values.
DELETE Cfg Deletes Configuration number Cfg 1-8.
This command saves the configuration data that follows as

DOWNLOAD Cfg
configuration Cfg. Cfg must be 1-8 or END.
This command uploads the names of the configurations to

Port the port specified by Port. Port must either be “1284”,
GET_NAMES or “SERIAL”, “USB”, or “ETHERNET”.
FILE;NAME Alternatively, “FILE” followed by a filename NAME can be
used to store the info into a file.
This command uploads general information about the printer
to the port specified by Port. Port must either be “1284”,
INFO Port “SERIAL”, “USB”, or “ETHERNET”.
The format of the return information is discussed later in this
section.
Cfg can be 0-8 (0=Factory). This loads configuration Cfg. If

configuration Cfg was not previously saved, the operator panel
LOAD Cfg
will display an error message and the current configuration
will not be changed.
This command selects the active Management Protocol

MPI_SELECT MPI Interface (MPI). Currently there are two selections “UCP” and
“PXML”. The default is PXML.
Page | 264
Loads the NIC configuration:

NETCFG 0 or 1
0 = OEM Configuration, 1 = MFG Configuration
This command overlays the configuration data that follows on

existing configuration Cfg. Cfg must be 1-8 (or END). If Cfg
OVERLAY Cfg
does not exist then command is treated the same as
DOWNLOAD.
LOCK Parameter “LOCK” locks the operator configuration menu.
PANEL or Parameter “UNLOCK” unlocks the menu and allows the

operator access to the menus. By default, the menu is
UNLOCK unlocked.
This command selects the port that the PNE will use to
communicate to the printer.
PNE_PORT Port The valid ports are “DISABLE”, “ETHERNET”, or “USB”.
NOTE: If ETHERNET is selected but not enabled, the
selection will revert to DISABLE.
This command sets the Ethernet Port the PNE uses to

PNE_PORT_NUM Port Number communicate if the PNE Port was set to Ethernet.
NOTE: This causes the printer to automatically reboot.
Sets the power-up configuration to Cfg and loads

POWERUP Cfg Configuration Cfg. Cfg can be any value from 0-8, where
0=Factory.
Print Configuration Cfg. Cfg can be a number 1-8, or one of
four pre-defined configurations. The four non-numeric
PRINT Cfg
configurations are requested using the first character for the
CURRENT, FACTORY, POWERUP, or ALL configuration(s).
This command sets the Ethernet Port the PXML and UCP will
PXML_PORT_NUM Port Number use to communicate if the PXML Port is set to Ethernet.
NOTE: This causes the printer to automatically reboot.
RESET Reboots the printer.
Cfg must be 1-8. This command will save the current

SAVE Cfg configuration as configuration Cfg. If Cfg is not in the range of
1-8, the command is ignored.
Tag is the name of the menu as defined in the menu file. Value
is the value to which the menu is to be set. This function should
SETMENU Value;Tag
be used with great caution as setting an invalid Value could
make the printer non-functional.
Page | 265
This command uploads a set of menu values to the location

Port Port. Port must either be “1284”, “SERIAL”, “USB”, or
Tag1 “ETHERNET”. Following a line terminator (e.g., CR+LF), a
GETMENU
… series of Tags can be listed (each separated by a line
terminator) with CONFIG-GETMENU;END marking the end.
TagN
See the example later in this Section.
This command downloads a name for the configuration

SET_NAME Cfg
specified by Cfg. Cfg must be 1-8.
This command uploads the configuration stored in location

Port;Cfg Cfg to the port specified by Port. Port must either be “1284”,
UPLOAD or “SERIAL”, “USB”, or “ETHERNET”. Cfg may be 1-8 or ALL.
FILE;Name;Cfg Alternatively, “FILE” followed by a filename NAME can be
used to store the configuration into a file.
Configuration Upload / Download

The UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD command can be used for uploading and downloading complete printer
configurations. If a customer needs to configure 50 printers identically, the customer needs only configure
one printer and UPLOAD the configurations. The configurations uploaded may then be sent to other
printers as jobs eliminating the necessity for the operator to configure each printer manually.
The UPLOAD command will always place a header and footer into the uploaded data. This header will be
the DOWNLOAD command followed by the configuration number. The footer will be the DOWNLOAD END
command. The operator should be aware that the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD commands use a
secondary copy of the menu structure which does not affect the printer's active configuration. This allows
the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD commands to operate without affecting the printer's current configuration.
If the operator intends to use one of the configurations after downloading, the operator should reboot the
printer to ensure proper operation. This can be accomplished by adding the RESET command as the last
command in your setup file. This is necessary because the printer caches the active configuration.
Rebooting the printer ensures that the desired configuration is correctly read from FLASH.
NOTE: While an upload or download is in progress, the Front Panel will be unavailable.
INFO Return Status

The INFO command returns a collective set of the information about the printer state in the following
format:
!PTX_SETUP
CONFIG-INFO
RTC;<HOUR:MIN:SEC DAY-MONTH-YEAR>
MODEL;<Model Name>
PROGRAM VERSION;<Program File Version>
PROGRAM FILE; <Program File Number>
SERIAL NUMBER;<Serial Number of Printer>
DPI;<203, 300, or 600>
RFID;<1=Present, 0=Not Installed>
ODV;<1=Present, 0=Not Installed>
Page | 266
GPIO;<1=Present, 0=Not Installed>
PTX_END
GETMENU Command and Return Data

The GETMENU command is formed to allow the user to name a set of menus to be returned back to the
host system per the following format example, sending the results back through the host network:
!PTX_SETUP
CONFIG-GETMENU;ETHERNET
igpswitch
serbaud
CONFIG-GETMENU;END
PTX_END
The results coming back through the network host would look something like this:
!PTX_SETUP
CONFIG-GETMENU
igpswitch;2
serbaud;3
CONFIG-GETMENU;END
PTX_END
FILE_IO Commands
!PTX_SETUP
FILE_IO–Action;Parameter
PTX_END
Table 28. PTX_SETUP FILE_IO Commands
When Filename is provided, this begins capturing all incoming

data into given Filename. This file will be targeted for the
DRIVE (see below) supplied.
CAPTURE Filename When all data to be captured has been received, this same
command should be sent without the Filename parameter to
terminate the capture process and commit the data to a
specified drive.
Page | 267
When a Network Certificate file is downloaded using the

FILE_IO CAPTURE. The certificate type will be set. The
types available are:
MQTT
MC - CA Certificate
PC - Printer Certificate
CERTTYPE Filename;Type PK - Private Key
FS - File Store
802.1x
SP - Printer Certificate
SK - Private Key
SC - CA Certificate
DEL Filename The DEL action will mark Filename as deleted.
The drive letter chooses between the Flash File System, SD

Card, or USB drive (if available). No drive letter or the drive
DRIVE Letter
letter A selects the Flash File System. The drive letter B
selects the SD card, letter D selects the USB drive if available.
When File is provided, space is reserved based on the Size

parameter. The parameter PROPS is the four-byte value that
File;Prop; specifies the file properties.
DUMPFILE
Size When all data to be captured has been received, this same
command should be sent without the parameters to terminate
the capture process and commit the data to the original File.
Causes the printer to optimize the Flash File System. The

OPTIMIZE
printer automatically reboots during this process.
The PROPS action will set the file properties of a given file.
The file properties are a four letter, case sensitive file
PROPS File;Prop descriptor. The properties field can be used to ensure that a
file is used for its intended purpose. Once properties have
been associated with a file, they cannot be changed.
The RUNFILE action will open the file named File for printing.
After the PTX_END command is processed, the contents of
File will get printed before any more data is read from the
RUNFILE File;Prop
host. If the Prop field is present, RUNFILE will verify that Prop
matches the saved file properties. Any mismatch will cause
the command to be ignored.
Reads the file named File out of the flash file system and
UPLOAD File;Port sends it to a host computer via the Port I/O port. Port is either
“1284”, “SERIAL”, “USB”, or “ETHERNET”.
When a file is opened for writing with the FILE_IO–CAPTURE;Filename command, the system will allocate
RAM for file control blocks as needed. If the file already exists on the Flash File System and the System >
Flash File Edit > Overwrite Files menu is set to disable, a warning will be displayed on the front panel. After
Page | 268
clearing the warning, the file data will be printed. To overwrite the existing file, set the Overwrite Files option
to enable.
Due to the nature of writing files, the data is first stored into RAM. As a result, the printer must have
sufficient available RAM. If the printer is not able to allocate enough RAM, a warning will be displayed on the
front panel.
None of the captured file data will be committed to flash until the entire file is loaded and the terminating
command “FILE_IO–CAPTURE” is received. Receipt of the command will cause all file data to be written
to the drive targeted with the “FILE_IO-DRIVE” command. Any errors with this process will result in a front
panel warning message.
Example to store file “Test.bmp” to Flash:
!PTX_SETUP
FILE_IO–DRIVE;A
FILE_IO–CAPTURE;Test.bmp
PTX_END
<data>
<data>
<data>
!PTX_SETUP
FILE_IO–CAPTURE
PTX_END
NOTE: Lack of available flash memory might be due to files that have been deleted but the flash
space has not been reclaimed. Such flash can be reclaimed by using the System > Flash File
Edit > Optimize & Reboot function.
NOTE: After selecting the Optimize & Reboot function, do not shut off the printer's power until after
the printer returns to the power-on state. Loss of power during the optimize process may
corrupt the printer's program. If this occurs, first attempt to repeat the downloading process. If
that fails, contact an authorized service representative.
ENGINE Commands
!PTX_SETUP
ENGINE–Action;Parameter
PTX_END
Table 29. PTX_SETUP ENGINE Commands
Set the Auto Label Mapping wide width (units of

1/1000”; e.g., a wide width value of 1000 = 1”), which
represents the width of the image in the file sent from
ALM_WIDE wide width the host which is to be auto label mapped into several
labels, each of which will have a width of narrow width.
#labels = wide width/narrow width (rounded down)
Page | 269
Set the Auto Label Mapping narrow width, which

represents the width of one auto mapped label (in units
of 1/1000”; e.g., a narrow width value of 1000 = 1”).
ALM_NARROW narrow width This width should be set prior to the wide width. In
addition, it can never exceed the physical width of the
printer. If it does, the narrow width will be automatically
reduced to the Media > Image > Label Width value set
in the configuration menu.
N Set Auto Label Mapping to Narrow, Wide, or Off. Enter

“N” for Narrow, “W” for Wide, or any other letter to
ALM_ENABLE W
disable ALM. By default, only the Narrow option is
* implemented.
EJECT Performs a Form Feed.
Shifts the image Value horizontally in 1/1000” units. If
Value is out of range with the panel menu Media >
IMAGE_SHFT_H Value
Image > Horizontal Shift , the command will be
ignored.
Shifts the image Value vertically in 1/1000” units. If
IMAGE_SHFT_V Value Value is out of range with the panel menu Media >
Image > Vertical Shift , the command will be ignored.
Sets the Media > Image > Label Length using 1/1000”
LENGTH Value
units.
Sets the type of media handling:
0 - Continuous
1 - Tear-Off Strip
MEDIA_HANDLING Value
2 - Tear-Off (Not Available on T800/T4000)
3 - Peel-Off
4 - Cut
Value of 0 turns mirroring off, non-zero turns mirroring
MIRROR Value
on.
X Parameter “X” sets the print mode to Thermal Transfer,
MODE parameter “D” sets to Direct Thermal.
D
Enables the ODV unit so that ODV begins verifying
ODV 1 printed barcodes.
Requests the printer to back up one form (as defined
by the Form Length) and then print out an overstrike
pattern.
OVERSTRIKE 0
This command should only be used if the Validator >
Control > Validator Action is set to Retry Form.
Sets the Media > Image > Label Width using 1/1000”
WIDTH Value units.
Page | 270
RFID Commands
!PTX_SETUP
RFID–Action;Parameter
PTX_END
NOTE on Action EPC_LENGTH:

Extreme caution should be used when utilizing this command. In normal circumstances, calibrating tags
requires only using the “Run Calibration” menu. When tags are calibrated, the maximum sizes of the various
RFID banks (including the EPC bank) are automatically set based on the silicon type detected. The values
determined by the calibration should not be changed. Emulation commands can read or write any EPC
length that is less than or equal to the maximum EPC length without changing this value.
There is only one circumstance where a user might want to set this value: if during calibration a warning
message is displayed on the control panel that the silicon type was not recognized, the maximum EPC length
can be manually set with this command if known. If the silicon type in the tags being used does not support
a length as long as the maximum length set by this command, all subsequent read and write tag operations
will fail.
Table 30. PTX_SETUP RFID Commands
Sets the maximum length of the EPC bank in

EPC_LENGTH Bit Length
bits.
Enables/disables reporting of RFID overstrikes

OVERSTRIKE_REPORT ON or OFF
to the host. The default is OFF (disabled).
Enables/disables reporting of RFID statistics to
STATISTICS_REPORT ON or OFF
the host. The default is OFF (disabled).
STATISTICS_CLEAR Clears the RFID statistics.
Returns the RFID statistics values as shown in

GET_STATISTICS
a following example later in this section.
Executes the RFID calibration procedure. This

will take a few minutes. After the calibration
RFID_CAL
completes, information is returned in the same
format as with RFID_LASTCAL.
Return information about the last RFID
RFID_LASTCAL calibration in the form shown in the section
below.
Return expanded information about the last

RFID calibration in the form shown in the
section below. This command returns all of the
same information as returned by
GET_CALINFO
RFID_LASTCAL in addition to some extra
pieces of information about the calibration
results, including the currently chosen
operation order.
Page | 271
Sets the Operation Order in the RFID

Calibration Params menu to Encode Before
Print, Encode During Print, or Encode After
RFID_DURING_PRINT, Print. No all operation orders are legal for all
SET_OPORDER RFID_BEFORE_PRINT, tag types. If an operation order is not legal for
or RFID_AFTER_PRINT the currently calibrated tag type, the setting will
be ignored. Success in changing the setting
can be confirmed with the GET_CALINFO
command.
Sets the number of retries in the “Label Retry”

menu. This number represents the number of
SET_LABELRETRY Number of Retries successive tags that will be overstruck due to
failed RFID operations before a fault is
declared on the control panel
RFID_ERR_NONE,
Changes the value of the “Error Handling”
SET_ERRHANDLE RFID_ERR_STOP, or
RFID menu to None, Stop, or Overstrike mode.
RFID_OVERSTRIKE
Returns information about items in the RFID

control menu including the number of retries
GET_RFIDCONTROL and the RFID error handling mode. It returns
information in the form shown in the section
below.
The GET_STATISTICS information that is returned to the host is with this format:
!PTX_SETUP
RFID-GET_STATISTICS
TID;<TID>
RFID TAGS PASSED;<Number of Tags with all RFID Passed>
WRITE TAGS FAIL;<Number of Tags Failed Due To Write Operation>
READ TAGS FAIL;<Number of Tags Failed Due To Read Operation>
LOCK TAGS FAIL;< Number of Tags Failed Due To Lock Operation>
PTX_END
The RFID_LASTCAL information that is returned to the host is with this format:
!PTX_SETUP
RFID_LASTCAL-INFO
TID;<TID>
FORM LENGTH;<xx.yy inches>
POSITION;<xx.yy inches>
WRITE POWER;<Power Setting>
READ POWER;<Power Setting>
PTX_END
Page | 272
The GET_CALINFO information that is returned to the host is with this format:
!PTX_SETUP
RFID-GET_CALINFO
TID;<TID>
POSITION;<xx.yy inches>
BASE POS;<xx.yy inches>
READ POWER;<Power Setting>
WRITE POWER;<Power Setting>
ANTENNA;<0 for external antenna and 1 for internal antenna>
TID;<TID that identifies silicon in calibrated tags>
USR SIZE;<Size of USR Bank on calibrated tags>
EPC SIZE;<Size of EPC Bank on calibrated tags>
OPERATION ORDER;<Operation Order>
PTX_END
The GET_STATISTICS information that is returned to the host is with this format:
!PTX_SETUP
RFID-GET_RFIDCONTROL
ERROR HANDLING;<RFID Error Handling Mode>
LABEL RETRY;<Number of Label Retries>
PTX_END
ODV-2D Commands
!PTX_SETUP
ODV–Action;Parameter
PTX_END
Table 31 PTX_SETUP Commands for ODV-2D
ON or 1 When enabled, search graphics within the job for

GRAPHICS barcodes. Otherwise, ignore the graphics and only
OFF or 0 process the barcode command from the emulations.
ALL
ORIENT PICKET Choose the orientations of the barcodes to process.
LADDER
Skip a certain number of labels from ODV2D
0 = OFF processing. If zero, no labels will be skipped (ignored).
SKIP 1-9999 = # If 1-9999, this number of labels will be skipped.
> 9999 = ON Numbers > 9999 will result in indefinite skipping of
labels.
ON or 1 When enabled, Code 39 barcodes will be processed.

CODE39
OFF or 0 Otherwise, they will be ignored on the label.
Page | 273

CODE128
ON or 1 When enabled, Interleaved 2/5 barcodes will be

INT2/5
OFF or 0 processed. Otherwise, they will be ignored on the label.

CODE93
ON or 1 When enabled, Codabar barcodes will be processed.

CODABAR
ON or 1 When enabled, UPC and EAN barcodes will be

UPC/EAN
ON or 1 When enabled, PDF417 barcodes will be processed.

PDF417
ON or 1 When enabled, Micro PDF417 barcodes will be

MICRO417 (FUTURE)
ON or 1 When enabled, Data Matrix barcodes will be

DATAMATRIX
ON or 1 When enabled, QR barcodes will be processed.

QR
ON or 1 When enabled, Aztec barcodes will be processed.
AZTEC (FUTURE)
Allows a barcode that is pre-printed on the label to be

included for the ODV-2D to validate. The parameters
are as follows:
SYMB; SYMB = Symbology (same strings as used in the
Action list above)
X1;Y1
X1;Y1 = Upper left-hand corner in 1/1000 inches.
ZONE X2;Y2
X2;Y2 = Lower right-hand corner in 1/1000 inches.
ROT;MIN
ROW;COL ROT = “NOR”, “CCW”, “CW”, or “INV”
MIN = Minimum bar size in 1/1000” inches
ROW = Data Matrix rows
COL = Data Matrix columns
Page | 274
Miscellaneous Commands
LP MODE Commands
!PTX_SETUP
LPMODE;Parameter
PTX_END
Protocol must be 0-4. This command resets the

software protocol, and is selected as follows:
0 - P-Series
n/a Protocol 1 - P-Series XQ
2 - Serial Matrix
3 - Proprinter III XL
4 - Epson FX-1050
NIC_SETUP Commands
!PTX_SETUP
NIC_SETUP
<NIC setup command>
<NIC setup command>
<NIC setup command>
END_NIC_SETUP
PTX_END
NIC setup is for advanced users only and requires using commands as described in the Ethernet User’s
Manual. Here is an example below:
!PTX_SETUP
NIC_SETUP
store net tcp opts -zeroiparp
store ifc from default
store ifc 2 wlan ssid ap1231_vl1_open
store pping opts enable
store pping packet 2
store pping period 2
END_NIC_SETUP
PTX_END
Page | 275
GPIO Commands
!PTX_SETUP
GPIO–Action;Parameter
PTX_END
Triggers a GPIO event by the Value given. Valid

EVENT Value event numbers range from 0-65535.
PRINTJOB Commands
!PTX_SETUP
PRINTJOB–Action;Parameter
PTX_END
Start of job marker. Results in a “start of job” message

START jobID sent back to host through the PPM port when a job
starts printing.
End of job marker. Results in a “end of job” message

END jobID sent back to host through the PPM port when the job
finishes printing.
Page | 276
G Quick Change Memory Card
(QCMC)
Overview
The QCMC provides the ability to duplicate an entire printer’s firmware, saved configurations, and
custom files quickly through the printer’s control panel with a user friendly interface. No external host or
files are needed to transfer this information to the QCMC. A “snapshot image” is saved of the printer’s
firmware, configuration settings, and custom files. The saved image can be copied to any number of
printers using the same QCMC so that the printers will be identically configured (assumes same printer
hardware and options are present).
The QCMC has its own resident network MAC address that will be used in place of the printer’s
LAN/WLAN MAC address when the card is left installed in a printer. This allows a mission critical printer
to be exchanged quickly with a spare printer that will be identically configured, including the network
MAC address.
The following are examples of how the QCMC may make printer management more convenient:
• A site has 10 printers to install that should all be configured identically. Rather than inputting the
information through the control panel individually to each printer, insert the QCMC into the first
printer, capture the changes, and then easily share the image with the other nine printers.
• A site is adding additional printers and wants them configured the same as the printers already
installed, but is unsure what changes were originally made. By using the QCMC to capture the
exact image of the older printers, no custom settings will be missed.
• A printer is set up on a network that is configured to only allow recognized MAC addresses to
access the network. If the printer with the QCMC installed needs repair and must be removed
from the network, the MAC that resides on the QCMC can be easily transferred to the
replacement printer, along with all the configuration information and any other files stored as the
“snapshot image” on the QCMC, making the replacement printer an exact duplicate for the
downed printer. By using the MAC address that resides on the QCMC, the replacement printer
can be installed without notifying the network administrator, thereby simplifying the exchange.
Page | 277
Installing the QCMC
CAUTION You must power off the printer before you install or remove the QCMC, or you
may damage the QCMC and the printer. If you remove the QCMC after powering
on the printer with the QCMC installed, the fault message “SD REMOVED
Reboot Printer” will display. You cannot clear this message by reinserting the
QCMC. You must cycle power.
2. Insert the QCMC SD card into the QCMC slot on the back of the printer.
QCMC Slot
Figure 16 QCMC Slot on Back of Printer
Saving the Printer’s Configuration to the QCMC

NOTE: The MAC address residing on the QCMC will be used in place of the MAC assigned to the
printer’s own network card whenever the QCMC is installed. If you do not want to identify the
printer with this MAC address, make sure the QCMC is removed from the printer before
attaching the printer to the network.
When the printer software detects the presence of a QCMC at power-up, a check of the QCMC will be
performed to determine if there is already a saved flash image available. If no printer flash image exists on
the QCMC, the software will then check to see if there are any saved configurations in the printer. If the
QCMC is blank (no flash image) and saved configurations are detected in the printer, then the user will be
prompted with a message on the front panel to save the printer’s configuration to the QCMC as shown
below.
Page | 278
NOTE: This screen will appear every time at power-up until the printer’s flash is saved to the QCMC.
If the RIGHT ARROW key is pressed, the printer will reboot into normal operation and not save any
information to the QCMC. On subsequent power-ups the Save message, shown above, will display again.
When the ENTER key is pressed, the printer will not go ONLINE, but instead will copy the printer’s entire
flash image to the QCMC, creating a snapshot of the printer’s memory.
Below is a list of items that will be saved to the QCMC:
• Printer Program File (software)
• Custom configurations (1–8)
• Feature files or CST’s that have been downloaded on the printer.
• All variable settings from the printer’s NVRAM
• Network settings including IP Address
• Other user files, such as fonts, bitmaps, or graphics files downloaded to the printer.
While the printer is saving its QCMC settings to the SD card, the following message will display. This could
take a few minutes to complete.
WARNING During this process, do not turn off the power. The time it takes to complete
the process depends on the amount of information in flash and may take
longer when large user files are included.
Upon successful completion of saving a flash image to the QCMC, the printer will display a message
indicating the operation is complete as shown in the following figure. The printer will then reboot into
normal operation.
Page | 279
In the unlikely case there is not enough space on the SD to save the entire flash image, you will be
prompted with a message “NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON SD / Delete SD File”. This is a fatal error and
requires user intervention:
• Cycle power on the printer.
• When prompted to save the QCMC select the RIGHT ARROW key to skip. The printer will then
boot normally and go ONLINE.
• Go OFFLINE and find the System > SD File Edit > Delete SD Files menu.
• Delete unnecessary SD files then try the QCMC Save operation again.
Copying the QCMC “Snapshot” Image to a Second Printer

Always power off the printer before removing or inserting the QCMC. Place the QCMC into the second
printer’s memory slot. Upon power up, the printer software detects the presence of a QCMC and a check
of the QCMC will be performed to determine if there is already a saved flash image from this QCMC on
the printer. If no, the following screen will display:
NOTE: This message will appear every time at power-up until the QCMC settings are copied to the
printer.
If the RIGHT ARROW key is pressed, the printer will reboot into normal operation and not copy any
information to the printer. On subsequent power-ups the Copy message above will display again if the
QCMC remains installed in the printer.
IMPORTANT: If the QCMC remains installed in the printer, the MAC address onboard will be
used in place of the resident MAC address to the printer’s LAN/WAN interface
card.
When the ENTER key is pressed, the printer will not go ONLINE immediately, but will copy the contents of
the QCMC to the flash memory, creating a clone of the original printer. Before the copy process is allowed
to continue, the printer hardware will be checked. If the printer hardware is incompatible with the QCMC
contents, the screen shown below will be displayed, and the printer will not copy any settings.
Page | 280
This means that the QCMC is not compatible with the printer’s software or hardware. A software upgrade
is required, or a different configured QCMC will be needed.
A QCMC validation check will also be performed to ensure the data stored on the SD is not corrupted. If
the test fails the following fault message will display.
This means that the data on the QCMC was not saved properly, and must be deleted then resaved.
Follow the instructions for deleting files, and then repeat the copying process.
If all the checks pass, then the printer will copy the files from the QCMC to the target printer. While this
copy is in progress, the following message will be displayed.
Upon successful completion, the printer will display the following message on the front panel and reboot
into normal operation.
Page | 281
IMPORTANT: When the copy is completed and the printer reboots, the user should run auto-
calibration to make sure the configuration changes are used in the calibration
process.
Updating the QCMC Image

This option should only be used when a QCMC image has previously been stored from the target printer.
If some configuration settings have been altered from that point, the menu System > SD File Edit >
QCMC Update can be used to update the configuration settings in the image stored on the QCMC.
Below is a list of items that will be updated on the QCMC by the QCMC Update operation:
• Custom configurations (1–8)
• All variable settings from the printer’s NVRAM
• Network settings including IP Address
Below is a list of items that will NOT be updated on the QCMC by the QCMC Update operation:
• Printer Program File (software)
• Feature files or CST’s that have been downloaded on the printer.
• Other user files, such as fonts, bitmaps, or graphics files downloaded to the printer.
While the printer is updating the QCMC configuration, the following message will display.
WARNING During this process, do not turn off the power.

indicating the operation is complete. The printer will then reboot into normal operation.
Erasing the QCMC Image

This option should only be used when a QCMC has already been stored and when the user desires to
start fresh with a new image.
To utilize this option, navigate to the menu System > SD File Edit > QCMC Erase and press the ENTER
key. When this option is activated, all QCMC files and configurations will be deleted from the SD card.
While the printer is erasing the QCMC configuration, the following message will display. This could take
several minutes.
Page | 282
WARNING During this process, do not turn off the power.
indicating the operation is complete. The printer will then reboot into normal operation.
Page | 283
H Custom Configuration
Module (CCM)
Overview
You can make a standard SD card or USB drive into a Custom Configuration Module (CCM) that can
be used to configure an unlimited number of printers one at a time. The programmed CCM can contain
any combination of printer firmware (program file), a feature file, a CST, downloadable fonts and forms,
NIC configurations, customer files, and PTX_SETUP config files.
The CCM is made using the PSA File Utility to create a set of configuration files (CCMLOAD.xxx,
CCMHOST.000) that are copied onto an SD card or USB drive. Once the CCM Package of files is copied,
the SD card or USB drive can be used to identically configure an unlimited number of printers (one by
one). The list of files that can be loaded onto a CCM are shown in the table below:
Content Max Files Headers File Origin

Program File * 1 Y Printronix Firmware (e.g., P300768.exe)
Feature File 1 Y Printronix Feature File (e.g., P300774.exe)
CST File 1 Y PNE Suite CST Manager
GPIO File 1 Y PNE Suite GPIO Manager
Fonts 25 Y TrueTypes or Intellifonts
File System 25 Y Custom Files, Logos, Forms
Network Config 1 N Telnet Commands to setup Network
Emulation Setup 25 N Emulation Commands for Initialization
Printer Config 1 N PTX_SETUP config file via PNE Suite
* A program file is always required for a valid CCM. See CCM Content Description for complete details.
Creating a CCM Package

Creating a CCM Package is easy using the PSA File Utility which is available on our company’s website.
Run the PSA File Utility and then execute the Custom Config Module section as follows:
This will bring up a Create CCM dialog window. From there, highlight items in the list with the left mouse
button and use the right mouse button to choose an option:
Page | 284
Some customizations will only allow one selection, while others will allow multiple selections. In the case
that an (.exe) is selected for the Program or Feature File, the user will be prompted to have the files
executed (unzipped) prior to adding them to the customization file.
For Fonts and File System selections, the customization file requires a download header. If the selected
file does not contain a download header and it is required, the user will be prompted to add one. For other
cases like the CST and GPIO files, those headers are create ONLY by the PNE Suite and any attempt to
include files that do not contain proper headers will be rejected. See CCM Content Description below for
complete details.
Once the CCM content tree is complete, the Create button asks the user to choose a directory to store the
configuration package. This directory can be the target SD card or USB drive or another directory. The
configuration files created (CCMHOST.000 and CCMLOAD.000-CCMLOAD.xxx) must all be copied onto
the target SD card or USB drive before use.
IMPORTANT When creating the new CCM Package, any existing CCM files (CCMHOST.000 and
CCMLOAD.000-CCMLOAD.xxx) in that directory will be deleted.
Configuring Printers
CAUTION You must power off the printer before you install or remove the SD card or USB drive.
Do not remove the SD card or USB drive until prompted by the printer when the CCM
update has been completed.
2. Insert the SD card or USB drive with the CCM file package into the printer.
3. Hold down the UP arrow key.
4. Turn the printer power on and release the UP arrow key when you hear a beep or see the LEDs flash.
5. After the printer powers-up, the following message will be displayed on the front panel:
Page | 285
NOTE: If the printer reports the CCM is empty, then it could not find the CCMLOAD.xxx files on the SD
card or USB drive. Turn off the printer and check the contents of the SD card or USB drive.
Also make sure the SD card or USB drive are properly inserted.
6. When the ENTER key is pressed, the printer will start the configuration process.
IMPORTANT Do NOT power off the printer until the process is complete. This may require an additional
1-2 reboots depending on the content.
7. When the process completes the printer will display one of the following messages on the front panel:
NOTE: The printer may reboot during the configuration process, this is normal. Do NOT interrupt the
printer until it displays one of the messages above.
8. Turn off the printer and remove the CCM. This process can be repeated on any number of printers.
Printer Firmware Compatibility

A CCM can be created for use on Printronix Auto ID T800 printer. If you are using older printer code (see
list below), you can create a CCM using only an SD card. Newer printer code supports either an SD card
or USB CCM.
Firmware revisions below this level only support SD card – newer revisions support both
FILE,PRGM,PTX,T800,CMB-MGL V1.20D P301002
Page | 286
CCM Content Description
Program File and Feature File
Program Files and Feature Files are created by Printronix and have part numbers starting with P3 (e.g.,
P300998). These files are provided as a zipped (.exe) file that can be executed on a Windows Command
shell or linux shell (unzip XXXXX.exe). This will extract either a program file (.prg) or a feature file
(.fls, .dwn) which contains the headers necessary to store the information into the printer when in
download mode.
The PSA File Utility will accept either the extracted file or the (.exe) directly as input. If the (.exe) is
provided, the CCM feature will perform the extraction for the user.
The most recent printer firmware releases can be found on our company’s website.
CST and GPIO Files

CST and GPIO files are created within the PrintNet Enterprise Suite available at no cost from our
company’s website. The PNE Suite has two utilities called the CST Manager and GPIO Manager,
respectively that can save the files with all the necessary headers. The CST Manager saves files as (.bnd)
and the GPIO Manager as (.gpf).
Fonts and File System

As the table shows, some files require headers. The headers are a 256-byte prefix with information on
how/where to store the data within the printer file system. For Font and Template selections the 256-byte
header (if not already present) can be added separately with the PSA File Utility or at the time when the
raw files are included within the CCM. Users will be prompted to create the headers automatically if the
files supplied do not have headers. Up to 25 (each) files can be added.
PGL Forms and Logos

Storing PGL forms or logos using this method can be tricky because the data stored in the File System
for a PGL logo or form is not the same content as when these items were originally sent to the printer
using the ;DISK parameter. Forms and Logos loaded using this method must have 256-byte headers
that apply *.frm (forms) or *.lgo (logos). Furthermore, the content cannot include the ;DISK parameter.
The recommended method of loading PGL forms and logos are using the Emulation Setup section.
Network Config File

The Network Config is a series of PrintNet internal command shell (npsh) commands explained in the
PrintNet Ethernet User’s Manual available from our company’s website. The internal commands must be
wrapped within a PTX_SETUP construct as shown below:
!PTX_SETUP
NIC_SETUP
store net tcp opts -zeroiparp
store ifc from default
store ifc 2 wlan ssid ap1231_vl1_open
store pping opts enable
store pping packet 2
store pping period 2
END_NIC_SETUP
PTX_END
This file is created manually by the user and typically stored with an extension (.ncg) to easily identify its
purpose. It is the responsibility of the user to verify the content is correct.
Page | 287
WARNING: Be sure the NIC Config File does not contain a “reset” command. This would prematurely
force a reboot and the CCM functionality may not work properly.
Emulation Setup
Emulation Setup files do not require headers. They are optional and interpreted by the emulations when
the CCM Package is installed. The order of these files added determines the order by which the
emulations will receive and interpret them. This type of file might be useful in order to run a job that stores
emulation forms and logos into the flash file system, so they are available at power-up.
For example, a PCX or TIFF logo could be converted to a PGL logo to be stored in Flash using the
Actions > PGL Logo Header function in the PSA File Utility. That resulting file could then be added to
this section to download the logo to Flash memory. Similarly, a PGL form with the CREATE command
and ;DISK parameter could be added to store that PGL form into Flash memory.
This emulation commands should not include anything that prints data because this is specifically for
setup purposes. Furthermore, because the printer configuration has not yet been configured, the
emulation commands MUST be consistent with the Factory default configuration (e.g., PGL as the Active
IGP Emulation).
PTX_SETUP Printer Config

The Printer Config is an optional part of the CCM Package to be used to store configuration and setup the
power-up configuration setting. The configuration is in the form of a PTX_SETUP file that is best generated
by PNE Suite to accurately represent the entire configuration, using internal menu identifiers.
If the configuration setup is consistent with the Factory, then this content can be omitted. The steps to
create a Printer Config are the following:
1. Load a target printer with the Program File firmware to be used with the CCM.
2. Start PNE Suite.
3. Use the Configuration Editor to upload the configuration from the printer.
4. Modify the Configuration as needed with the Configuration Editor.
5. Save the Configuration as a PTX_SETUP file (.ptx).
Page | 288
I Customer Support
Printronix Customer Support Center
IMPORTANT Please have the following information available prior to calling the Printronix
Customer Support Center:
• Model number
• Serial number (located on the back of the printer)
• Installed options (i.e., interface and host type if applicable to the problem)
• Configuration printout.
• Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer?
• Description of the problem (be specific)
• Good and bad pictures that clearly show the problem (faxing or emailing of
these samples may be required)
Americas (844) 307-7120

Service@PrintronixAutoID.com
Europe, Middle East, and Africa +31 24 3030340

EMEA_support@PrintronixAutoID.com
Asia Pacific +886 3 990 6155
APAC_support@PrintronixAutoID.com
China +86 755 2398 0479

CHINA_support@PrintronixAutoID.com
Printronix Auto ID Support: https://usca.tscprinters.com/en/technical-support
Page | 289
Corporate Offices
Printronix Auto ID
3040 Saturn Street, Suite 200
Brea, CA 92821
U.S.A.
Phone: (844) 307-7120

Fax: (657) 258-0817
Printronix Auto ID, EMEA Head Office

Georg-Wimmer-Ring 8b D-85604
Zorneding, Germany
Phone: +49 (0) 8106 37979-000

E-Mail: EMEA_Sales@PrintronixAutoID.com
Printronix Auto ID, Asia Pacific Head Office

Taiwan
9F, No. 95, Minquan Rd.
Xindian Dist., New Taipei City
231 Taiwan (R.O.C)
Phone: +886 3 990 6155

Fax: +886 3 990 6215
Printronix Auto ID, China Head Office

Shenzhen
New World Center 2510 room
No. 6009, Yitian road
Futian District, Shenzhen
518000
China
Phone: +86 755 2398 0479
Fax: +86 755 2398 0773
Visit the Printronix Auto ID website at https://usca.tscprinters.com/en/printronix-auto-id-

enterprise-printers
Page | 290
J Glossary
Baud (rate) Baud Rate is the number of information bits that can be
transmitted between the printer and the computer in one
second. For example, one baud equals one bit per
second in a series of binary signals. Both the printer and
the computer must be configured to the same baud rate.
BIT Binary digIT. A digit in the binary number system,

represented by a 0 or a 1. A bit is the smallest unit of
storage in a digital computer.
Boot-up The start-up procedure which causes a computer

operating system to be loaded into main memory.
Buffer An area of storage into which data is read or written

temporarily during data transfers.
Configuration Refers to the operating properties that define how the

printer responds to signals and commands received from
the host computer at the printer interface. These
properties are called configuration parameters and are
set to match the operating characteristics of the host
computer system.
Continuous Media Media comprised of one continuous length without a gap,

notch, hole, or black mark to establish a predetermined
label or tag length. With this media type, the Host Form
Length or user-selected Label Length sets the desired
length of each label.
Handling Mode A media handling mode that advances media in the

forward direction only.
Controller An independent functional logic unit in a data processing

system that controls data paths between one or more
units of peripheral equipment.
Data Bits Binary information sent to the printer; a character set

grouping containing letters, digits, and punctuation marks
to be printed.
Page | 291
Default A value, parameter, attribute, or option that is
assigned by a program or system when another
has not been specified by the user.
Diagnostic Pertaining to the detection and isolation of a printer

malfunction or mistake.
Direct Thermal Media Media coated with special chemicals that act as an
accelerator, acceptor dye, and binder. In Direct
Thermal mode, the heat from the selected
rectangular elements in the thermal printhead makes
direct contact with the media (no ribbon is used)
and causes a chemical reaction that creates the
image on the media.
Direct Thermal Printing A printing method in which no ribbon is used to

transfer data from the printhead to the media to
create an image. The thermal printhead selectively
heats small rectangular elements which make
direct contact with the coated media.
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory. Can be read

from or written to at any time. DRAM is volatile:
whatever is in DRAM is lost when power is turned
off.
Fanfold Media Media supplied in a fanfold stack instead of a roll format.
Flash Memory Printer configurations, programs, downloaded files, and

fonts are stored in Flash Memory. Data in Flash are not
lost when power is turned off (Resident fonts are fonts
permanently stored in Flash and availalbe at any time,
via software commands.)
Font A collection of printing characteristics for printing

alphanumeric characters, all of which combine to
produce a distinctive style of print.
Host Computer The computer that stores, processes, and sends data to
be printed, which communicates directly with the printer.
The term “host” is used to indicate the controlling
computer, since modern printers are themselves
microprocessor-controlled computer systems.
Interface The hardware component used to link two devices by

common physical interconnection, signal, and functional
characteristics.
IPS The speed at which the media is printed based on a

rate of Inches-Per-Second.
Page | 292
Label Liner (backing) The material labels are attached to during their
manufacturing process. Attachment is usually
accomplished with an adhesive. After printing, labels can
be easily removed from the liner and the liner discarded
or recycled.
Label Taken Sensor A sensor located at the front of the printer to detect the
presence of a label extended out the front of the printer.
The sensor is used only during Peel-Off Media Handling
to sense a label and then detect its removal prior to
printing the next label.
Media Material onto which data is printed by the printer. The

types of media supported by the printer are die-cut
labels or tag stock, supplied in roll or fanfold format.
Media is further described by the type of sensing used
to detect the Top-of-Form position based on the label
length indicators used. Transmissive (Gap) media
uses a liner gap, notch, or hole between labels, and
Reflective (Mark) media uses a horizontal black mark
located on the underside of the tag stock or label liner.
Continuous media (with no label length indicators)
uses no sensing method, and the operator determines
which label length is desired.
Media Sensor The sensor used to detect the presence of media in the
paper path as well as the gap, notch, or hole position of
Transmissive media or the horizontal black mark on
Reflective media.
Memory See RAM, Nonvolatile Memory, DRAM, and Flash

Memory.
Nonvolatile Memory Nonvolatile memory stores variables that must be

preserved when the printer is turned off, such as
configuration parameters and printer usage statistics.
NVRAM Acronym of Nonvolatile Random-Access Memory. See

Nonvolatile Memory.
Parity (check) Parity checking is the addition of a non-data bit to data,

resulting in the number of “1 bits” being either always
even or always odd. Parity is used to detect transmission
errors. Parity represents value in the check digit of the
received or transmitted data.
PCBA Printed Circuit Board Assembly. A PCB with

components (ICs, resistors, capacitors, etc.)
installed.
Page | 293
PGL Intelligent Graphics Printing software for the
Printronix Graphics Language, designated for
Printronix printers. PGL provides online forms,
barcodes, and many alphanumeric text-generation
capabilities and is compatible with earlier versions
of Printronix PGL protocol and programming.
Pitch (RFID) In the RFID industry, pitch is defined as the distance from
one point on an inlay to the same point on the next inlay.
Port A data channel used for receiving data from or

transmitting data to one or more external
devices.
Protocol The rules and conventions that govern

communication between a printer and a host
computer. A protocol includes codes for printing text
and graphics and codes instructing the printer to
perform special operations.
RAM Random-Access Memory. Also called “main

memory” or “working memory.” It is the active
memory of the printer into which programs are
loaded. RAM is saved to volatile memory
because data in RAM is lost when power is
turned off or interrupted.
Reflective Sensing Use of the lower media sensor only to transmit and
receive infrared light off the underside of media to detect
gaps, notches, holes, or horizontal black marks used for
determining the Top-of-Form position on labels or for
indicating a Paper Out condition.
Resolution A measure expressing the number of component units in

a given range used to create an image; in printing,
expressed as the number of dots per inch (dpi)
horizontally and vertically.
RFID Encoder The RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) encoder

programs smart labels (tags with embedded inlays).
Roll Media Media supplied in a roll format, usually wound on a 1-inch

or 3-inch cardboard core. The T800 media hanger
assembly accepts both core sizes.
Gap/Mark Sensor = Mark: The Sensed Distance value is the physical

distance from the leading edge of one black mark
to the leading edge of the next.
SD Card A small removable device used to store data. The SD

Card is used for fonts purchased from Printronix and
the QCMC (Quick Change Memory Card) option.
Page | 294
Slew Vertical paper movement.
Standard-Pitch RFID Labels Labels with RFID inlays that typically have a pitch
from 2.0 to 6.0 inches. These labels support
encoding of the tag and provide ample space to
print text, graphics, barcodes, or logos.
Stop Bits The signal which indicates the end of a character
or element.
Thermal Transfer Media Media specifically designed to work with a ribbon

for image transfer. In Thermal Transfer mode,
compatibility between the ribbon and the media is
critical in producing a high quality, long lasting
image.
Thermal Transfer Printing A printing method in which the printhead presses a

specially coated ribbon against the media. The
printhead elements react with the ribbon and bond
the image to the media.
Transmissive Sensing Use of the upper media sensor to transmit infrared

light through the top of media which is then received
by the lower media sensor to detect gaps, holes, or
notches for determining the Top-of-Form position on
labels or for indicating a Paper Out condition.
Page | 295
K Communication Notices
and Warranties
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.
Printronix may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries.
Consult your Printronix representative for information on the products and services currently available in
your area. Any reference to an Printronix product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that
only that Printronix product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any Printronix intellectual property rights may be used instead.
However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non- Printronix product,
program, or service.
Printronix may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this
document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send
license inquires, in writing, to:
Printronix Auto ID Technology, Inc.

3040 Saturn Street, Suite 200
Brea, CA 92821 U.S.A.
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such
provisions are inconsistent with local law:
PRINTRONIX PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-
INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do
not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may
not apply to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically
made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication.
Printronix may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) described in this publication at any
time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-Printronix Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not
in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not
part of the materials for this Printronix product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the
results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have
been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be
the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurement may have been estimated
through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data
for their specific environment.
Information concerning non-Printronix products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their
published announcements or other publicly available sources. Printronix has not tested those products
and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-
Printronix products. Questions on the capabilities of non-Printronix products should be addressed to the
suppliers of those products.
Printronix encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to responsibly recycle their
equipment when it is no longer needed. Printronix offers a variety of programs and services to assist
Page | 296
equipment owners in recycling their IT products. Information on these product recycling offerings can be
found on our company’s website.
Note!
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information and
Communication on page 297.
If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color illustrations may not appear.
For online versions of this book, we authorize you to:
Copy, modify, and print the documentation contained on the media, for use within your enterprise,
provided you reproduce the copyright notice, all warning statements, and other required statements on
each copy or partial copy.
Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you transfer the related Printronix product
(which may be either machines you own, or programs, if the program’s license terms permit a transfer).
You must, at the same time, destroy all other copies of the documentation.
You are responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes, resulting from this
authorization.
Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization. Upon termination, you must
destroy your machine readable documentation.
Communication Statements
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct
the interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission
limits. Printronix is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This product may contain an intentional radiator as shown below.
RFID Radio Module:

• Operating Frequency: 866-868MHz or 902 to 928 MHz
• Typical RF Power: 25 to 100 mW
• Maximum RF Power: 1 Watt under abnormal conditions
WiFi 802.11a/b/g/n Radio Module:

• Operating Frequency: 2.412 – 2.484 GHz, 4.9 to 5.845Ghz
• Typical RF Power: 2dBm
Page | 297
European Union Conformity
This product is in compliance with the EU directives for safety, EMC, ROHS,
REACH, and WEEE. A Declaration of Conformity is available from our
company’s website.
Printronix Auto ID cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements
resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-Printronix
option cards.
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A Information Technology
Equipment according to European standard EN 55032. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for
commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with
licensed communication devices.
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to reduce the potential for
causing interference to radio and TV communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment.
Printronix cannot accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than recommended
cables and connectors.
Industry Canada Compliance Statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A conform á la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Statement of CISPR 32 Compliance

Attention: This is a Class A Product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference
in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Page | 298
German Conformity Statement
Handbuchtexte: FCC class A entspricht: EMVG Klasse A
Text Für alle in Deutschland vertriebenen EN 55032 Klasse A Geräte:
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von
Geräten (EMVG) (bzw. der EMC EG Richtlinie 2014/30/EU):
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformitätszeichen -
CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraph 5 des EMVG ist die:
Printronix Auto ID Technology
Georg-Wimmer-Ring 8b D-85604
Zorneding, Germany
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 4 Abs. (1) 4:
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55032 Klasse A.
EN 55032 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden: “Warnung: dies ist
eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in
diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen und dafür
aufzukommen.”
EN 55024 Hinweis:
Wird dieses Gerät in einer industriellen Umgebung betrieben (wie in EN 55024 festgelegt), dann kann es
dabei eventuell gestört werden. In solch einem Fall ist der Abstand bzw. die Abschirmung zu der
industriellen Störquelle zu öergrvßern.
Anmerkung:
Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in den Printronix Handbüchern
angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.
Korea
Class A
(Broadcasting Communication Equipment for Office Use)
As an electromagnetic wave equipment for office use (Class A), this equipment is intended to use in other
than home area. Sellers or users need to take note of this.
A 급 기기
( 업무용 방송통신기자재 )
이 기기는 업무용 (A 급 ) 전자파적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 ,
가정외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다 .
CAUTION:
This product is equipped with a 3-wire power cord and plug for the user’s safety. Use this power cord in
conjunction with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock
Page | 299
China
Declaration:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which
case the user may need to perform practical actions.
海拔高度和非热带性气候声明
仅适用于海拔 2000M 以下地区安全使用
Page | 300
Software License Agreement
Your printer contains, among other software, Printronix operating software including, but not limited to the
Embedded Configurable Operating System (the “eCos Software”) as embedded software. The terms of
this Agreement apply only to the eCos Software, and all other embedded software supplied with the
printer. You accept the terms of this Agreement by your initial use of your printer.
1. Object Code License
Printronix grants you a nonexclusive license to use the Printronix Software, the eCos Software and all
other embedded software (collectively, the “Embedded Software” or the “Software”) only in conjunction
with the printer. As the rightful possessor of the printer, you may make a reasonable number of copies of
the Software as necessary for backup, configuration, and restoration of the printer. You must reproduce
the copyright notice and any other legend of ownership on each copy of the Software you make.
You may transfer possession of the Software and its media to another party only with the transfer of the
printer on which the Software is used. If you do so, you must give the other party a copy of these terms
and provide all user documentation to that party. When you do so, you must destroy any copies of
Software not resident in the printer.
Your license for the Software terminates when you no longer rightfully possess the printer. No other rights
under this license are granted.
2. Source Code
A source code version of eCos Software is available under the terms of a modified version of the GNU
General Public License (GPL) located under PCM eCos 3.0 from our company’s website. Printronix Auto
ID grants no rights whatsoever in the source code for the Printronix Auto ID Software.
3. No. Warranty
THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
WARRANTIES THAT THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS FREE OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY OF THE EMBEDDED
SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT RED HAT, PRINTRONIX, ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART
OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS AUTHORIZED
HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
4. Conflicting Terms
You agree that this Agreement provides you no more rights with regards to warranty, support, indemnity
or liability terms with respect to Printronix Inc, or any contributor to the Embedded Software than that
provided by any express warranty that may be made by Printronix, Inc.
5. Limitation of Liability
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE, SHALL RED HAT, PRINTRONIX, ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE, OR ANY PART
THEREOF, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER
PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY
CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK
STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION. OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL
DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO
LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY’S NEGLIGENCE
TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
Page | 301
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO
THAT EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. U.S. Government Users
The Embedded Software is a “commercial item,” as that term is defined in 48
C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct 1995), consisting of “commercial computer software” and “commercial computer
software documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48
C.F.R. 12.212 and 48
C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Code
with only those rights set forth herein.
7. Miscellaneous
This Agreement represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of
this Agreement is held to be unenforceable. This Agreement shall be governed by California law
provisions (except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-of-law
provisions.
8. eCosSoftware
eCos is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation, version 2 or a later.
eCos is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARANTY, without even the implied warranty of MERCHANT
ABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more
details.
You should receive a copy of the GNU General Public License along with eCos. If not, write to:
Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330
Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA.
As special exception, if other files instantiate templates or use macros or inline functions from this file, you
could compile this file and link it with other works to produce work based on this file. This file does not by
itself cause the resulting work to be covered by the GNU General Public License. However, the source
code for this file must be made available in accordance with section (3) of the GNU General Public
License.
This exception does not invalidate any other reasons why work based on this file might be covered by the
GNU General Public License.
Alternative licenses for eCos may be arranged by contacting Red Hat, Inc. at
http://sources.redhat.com/ecos/ecos-license/
eCos
eCos, the Embedded Configurable Operating System
Copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Red Hat, Inc.
Copyright © 2002, 2003 John Dallaway
Copyright © 2002, 2003 Nick Garnett
Copyright © 2002, 2003 Jonathan Larmour
Copyright © 2002, 2003 Andrew Lunn
Copyright © 2002, 2003 Gary Thomas
Copyright © 2002, 2003 Bart Veer
Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
© Unix System Laboratories, Inc.
All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the Unversity of California by
American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein
with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. All rights reserved.
Page | 302
Copyright © 2000 Brian Somers
Copyright © 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1997 Niklas
Hallqvist. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1998 Stephen Deering
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Stephen Deering of Stanford Unversity.
Portions of eCos code are distributed under several BSD style licenses. Other portions of eCos code are
distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License with a non-copyleft exception with allows
static links to non-copyleft programs.
Open SSL
Copyright © 1998-2004 The Open SSL Project. All rights reserved.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young. All rights reserved.
OpenSSL is distributed under the terms of the Open SSL and SSLeay licenses, which are both BSD
style open source licenses.
OpenSSL License
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the
original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case
of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use
in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/).
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without prior written ermission. For written
permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL"
appear in their names without prior written permission of the penSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This
product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE
Page | 303
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This
product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License

Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The
implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are
aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is
covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of
the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual)
provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by
Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the
library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory
(application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written
by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Page | 304
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot
be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence
[including the GNU Public Licence.]
WPA Supplicant License

Copyright (c) 2003-2013, Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> and contributors. All Rights Reserved.
This program is licensed under the BSD license (the one with advertisement clause removed).
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name(s) of the above-listed copyright holder(s) nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Brian Gladman AES Library

This library, written by Brian Gladman (http://www.gladman.me.uk/), contains code for implementing
encryption and decryption for AES (Rijndael) for block and key sizes of 16, 24 and 32 bytes. The firmware
contains a version of the library, taken from the following URL:
http://www.opensource.apple.com/source/xnu/xnu-1504.9.37/bsd/crypto/aes/
Copyright (c) 2003, Dr Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights reserved.
LICENSE TERMS
The free distribution and use of this software in both source and binary
form is allowed (with or without changes) provided that:
1. distributions of this source code include the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer;
2. distributions in binary form include the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other associated materials;
3. the copyright holder's name is not used to endorse products

built using this software without specific written permission.
ALTERNATIVELY, provided that this notice is retained in full, this product
Page | 305
may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License (GPL),
in which case the provisions of the GPL apply INSTEAD OF those given above.
DISCLAIMER
This software is provided 'as is' with no explicit or implied warranties

in respect of its properties, including, but not limited to, correctness
and/or fitness for purpose.
Google Font Open Sans

The Google Font “Open Sans” is used in the product for purposes of the front panel display only. Open
Sans is a humanist sans serif typeface designed by Steve Matteson, Type Director of Ascender Corp.
This version contains the complete 897 character set, which includes the standard ISO Latin 1, Latin CE,
Greek and Cyrillic character sets. Open Sans was designed with an upright stress, open forms and a
neutral, yet friendly appearance. It was optimized for print, web, and mobile interfaces, and has excellent
legibility characteristics in its letterforms.
The source is https://www.google.com/fonts/specimen/Open+Sans and is licensed to Printronix under the
terms of the Apache License, Version 2.0 described at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-
2.0.html.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in
compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under
the License.
Cousine Font
The Cousine Font is a monospaced font used in the product for purposes of the front panel display only.
The source is found at http://www.fontsquirrel.com/fonts/list/classification/monospaced and is licensed to
Printronix under terms of the Apache License, Version 2.0 described at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.html.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in
compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either
Page | 306
express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under
the License.
Limited Software Product Warranty

Printronix Auto ID Technology, Inc. warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will
perform in accordance with specifications published by Printronix Auto ID Technology, Inc. Printronix Auto
ID Technology, Inc. does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.
Remedy
Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Printronix Auto ID Technology, Inc. in connection with the
Software is replacement of defective software with a copy of the same version and revision level.
Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies

1. THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE
EXCLUDED. Printronix Auto ID Technology, Inc. does not warrant that the functions contained in the
Software will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error
free. Printronix Auto ID Technology, Inc. reserves the right to make changes and/or improvements in
the Software without notice at any time.
2. IN NO EVENT WILL PRINTRONIX AUTO ID TECHNOLOGY, INC. BE LIABLE FOR LOST PROFITS,
LOST DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS
PRODUCT, EVEN IF PRINTRONIX AUTO ID TECHNOLOGY, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE ABUSE OR
MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
3. Printronix Auto ID Technology, Inc. will not be liable for any loss or damage caused by delay in
furnishing a Software Product or any other performance under this Agreement.
4. Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our liability of any kind (including liability for
negligence except liability for personal injury caused solely by our negligence) for the Software Product
covered by this Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance by us under or related to
this Agreement are limited to the remedies specified by this Agreement.
5. California law governs this Agreement.
Termination of License Agreement

This License shall continue until terminated. This license may be terminated by agreement between you
and Printronix Auto ID Technology, Inc. or by Printronix Auto ID Technology, Inc. If you fail to comply with
the terms of this License and such failure is not corrected within thirty (30) days after notice. When this
License is terminated, you shall return to the place you obtained them, the printer and all copies of the
Software and documentation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights

Use, duplication or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in
Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 242.227-7013, subdivision (b) (3) (ii) or
subparagraph (c) (1) (ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c) (2).
Page | 307
Acknowledgement of Terms and Conditions
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE
TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY
STATEMENT OR REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT. NO CHANGE IN THIS
AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH PARTY. BY USING THIS PRINTER, YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
Product Warranty Information

Complete product warranty information for printers, accessories, options and consumables can be found
on our company’s website.
P180086-001 K
Page | 308

MANUAL T800 THERMAL

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MANUAL T800 THERMAL

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MANUAL T800 THERMAL

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Administrator’s Manual

Code V is a trademark of QMS, Inc.

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

AS/NZS CISPR 32, Class A

Mexico CoC UL 60950-1

CNS 13438 警告使用者：此為甲類資訊技術設備，於居

Energy Star for Imaging Equipment Version 3.0

Important Safety Instructions:

Below statement are for product with optional RF function.

All operational modes:

5150-5350MHz for Only indoor use

Canada, Industry Canada (IC) Notices

Canada, avis de l'Industry Canada (IC)

Important Safety Instructions

Trademark Acknowledgements ........................................................................... 2

3 Printer Settings ............................................................ 51

Saving a Configuration .................................................................... 53

Settings Organization ........................................................................ 57

Quick Setup ........................................................................................ 58

Host IO .......................................................................................... 105

Network ............................................................................................ 119

Application ..................................................................................... 135

Configs .............................................................................................. 184

Tools ................................................................................................. 187

RFID .................................................................................................. 197

4 Downloading Firmware .............................................. 199

5 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting ............................... 217

A Specifications ............................................................ 242

B Printer Options ........................................................... 249

C Media Cutter Installation ................................................ 251

D Peel-off Module Installation ............................................ 254

F PTX_SETUP Commands........................................... 263

G Quick Change Memory Card (QCMC) ....................... 277

H Custom Configuration Module (CCM) ........................ 284

I Customer Support...................................................... 289

J Glossary .................................................................... 291

The T800 Family of Printers

Table 1. The T800 Series

Max Print Printing Max Print

Controls and Indicators

LEFT SOFT key RIGHT SOFT key

PAUSET key FEED Key

PAUSE Key When ONLINE, sets printer to OFFLINE Mode

FEED Key Advances the media one label length. When

Navigational Keys Used to select icons, menu selection, and

Offline (Home) Screen

Media Handling Modes

Once you have decided on the mode, configure the printer.

Setting Up the Printer

2. T800 supports 3 kinds of paper core for ribbon.

Note: Please insert the right side of spindle

4. Separate the blue media guides.

Media guide RFID antenna

6. Press down on both sides of the top cover to close it gently.

2. Separate and hold open the media holders.

5. Press down on both sides of the top cover to close it gently.

Positioning the Media Sensors

Gap sensor (Receiver)

Black Mark Sensor (Moveable/ Reflective) Gap Sensor (Fixed/ Transmissive)

Vertical Gap and